EMFT Book

Electromagnetic Field Theory
B O T HID
U PSILON B OOKS
E LECTROMAGNETIC F IELD T HEORY
Electromagnetic Field Theory

B O T HID
Swedish Institute of Space Physics Uppsala, Sweden and Department of Astronomy and Space Physics Uppsala University, Sweden and LOIS Space Centre School of Mathematics and Systems Engineering Vxj University, Sweden
U PSILON B OOKS U PPSALA S WEDEN
Also available
E LECTROMAGNETIC F IELD T HEORY E XERCISES
by Tobia Carozzi, Anders Eriksson, Bengt Lundborg, Bo Thid and Mattias Waldenvik Freely downloadable from www.plasma.uu.se/CED
A This book was typeset in L TEX 2 (based on TEX 3.141592 and Web2C 7.4.4) on an HP Visualize 90003600 workstation running HP-UX 11.11.
Copyright 19972006 by Bo Thid Uppsala, Sweden All rights reserved. Electromagnetic Field Theory ISBN X-XXX-XXXXX-X
To the memory of professor

L EV M IKHAILOVICH E RUKHIMOV (19361997)
dear friend, great physicist, poet and a truly remarkable man.
Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book
Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.
Contents
Contents List of Figures Preface 1 Classical Electrodynamics 1.1 Electrostatics 1.1.1 Coulombs law 1.1.2 The electrostatic eld 1.2 Magnetostatics 1.2.1 Ampres law 1.2.2 The magnetostatic eld 1.3 Electrodynamics 1.3.1 Equation of continuity for electric charge 1.3.2 Maxwells displacement current 1.3.3 Electromotive force 1.3.4 Faradays law of induction 1.3.5 Maxwells microscopic equations 1.3.6 Maxwells macroscopic equations 1.4 Electromagnetic duality 1.5 Bibliography 1.6 Examples Electromagnetic Waves 2.1 The wave equations 2.1.1 The wave equation for E 2.1.2 The wave equation for B 2.1.3 The time-independent wave equation for E
ix xiii xv 1 2 2 3 6 6 7 9 10 10 11 12 15 15 16 18 21 27 28 28 29 29
ix
Contents
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3
Plane waves 2.2.1 Telegraphers equation 2.2.2 Waves in conductive media Observables and averages Bibliography Example
32 33 34 35 36 40 43 43 44 44 45 46 47 51 53 53 55 57 57 57 60 62 62 63 66 67 69 71 73 75 78 78 79 80 81 81 82
Electromagnetic Potentials 3.1 The electrostatic scalar potential 3.2 The magnetostatic vector potential 3.3 The electrodynamic potentials 3.4 Gauge transformations 3.5 Gauge conditions 3.5.1 Lorenz-Lorentz gauge 3.5.2 Coulomb gauge 3.5.3 Velocity gauge 3.6 Bibliography 3.7 Examples Electromagnetic Fields and Matter 4.1 Electric polarisation and displacement 4.1.1 Electric multipole moments 4.2 Magnetisation and the magnetising eld 4.3 Energy and momentum 4.3.1 The energy theorem in Maxwells theory 4.3.2 The momentum theorem in Maxwells theory 4.4 Bibliography 4.5 Example Electromagnetic Fields from Arbitrary Source Distributions 5.1 The magnetic eld 5.2 The electric eld 5.3 The radiation elds 5.4 Radiated energy 5.4.1 Monochromatic signals 5.4.2 Finite bandwidth signals 5.5 Bibliography Electromagnetic Radiation and Radiating Systems 6.1 Radiation from an extended source volume at rest 6.1.1 Radiation from a one-dimensional current distribution
6.2
6.3
6.4 6.5 7
6.1.2 Radiation from a two-dimensional current distribution Radiation from a localised source volume at rest 6.2.1 The Hertz potential 6.2.2 Electric dipole radiation 6.2.3 Magnetic dipole radiation 6.2.4 Electric quadrupole radiation Radiation from a localised charge in arbitrary motion 6.3.1 The Linard-Wiechert potentials 6.3.2 Radiation from an accelerated point charge 6.3.3 Bremsstrahlung 6.3.4 Cyclotron and synchrotron radiation 6.3.5 Radiation from charges moving in matter Bibliography Examples
85 89 89 93 95 96 97 98 100 108 112 119 126 128 135 135 136 138 143 146 147 147 148 151 154 157 157 157 163 164 171 173 175 175 175 175 176 176
Relativistic Electrodynamics 7.1 The special theory of relativity 7.1.1 The Lorentz transformation 7.1.2 Lorentz space 7.1.3 Minkowski space 7.2 Covariant classical mechanics 7.3 Covariant classical electrodynamics 7.3.1 The four-potential 7.3.2 The Linard-Wiechert potentials 7.3.3 The electromagnetic eld tensor 7.4 Bibliography Electromagnetic Fields and Particles 8.1 Charged particles in an electromagnetic eld 8.1.1 Covariant equations of motion 8.2 Covariant eld theory 8.2.1 Lagrange-Hamilton formalism for elds and interactions 8.3 Bibliography 8.4 Example Formul F.1 The electromagnetic eld F.1.1 Maxwells equations F.1.2 Fields and potentials F.1.3 Force and energy F.2 Electromagnetic radiation
xi
Contents
F.3
F.4 F.5
F.2.1 Relationship between the eld vectors in a plane wave F.2.2 The far elds from an extended source distribution F.2.3 The far elds from an electric dipole F.2.4 The far elds from a magnetic dipole F.2.5 The far elds from an electric quadrupole F.2.6 The elds from a point charge in arbitrary motion Special relativity F.3.1 Metric tensor F.3.2 Covariant and contravariant four-vectors F.3.3 Lorentz transformation of a four-vector F.3.4 Invariant line element F.3.5 Four-velocity F.3.6 Four-momentum F.3.7 Four-current density F.3.8 Four-potential F.3.9 Field tensor Vector relations F.4.1 Spherical polar coordinates F.4.2 Vector formulae Bibliography
176 176 176 177 177 177 178 178 178 178 178 178 179 179 179 179 179 180 180 182 183 183 183 185 188 190 192 192 193 194 202 203
M Mathematical Methods M.1 Scalars, vectors and tensors M.1.1 Vectors M.1.2 Fields M.1.3 Vector algebra M.1.4 Vector analysis M.2 Analytical mechanics M.2.1 Lagranges equations M.2.2 Hamiltons equations M.3 Examples M.4 Bibliography Index
xii
List of Figures
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 5.1 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 7.1 7.2 7.3 8.1
Coulomb interaction between two electric charges Coulomb interaction for a distribution of electric charges Ampre interaction Moving loop in a varying B eld Radiation in the far zone Linear antenna Electric dipole antenna geometry Loop antenna Multipole radiation geometry Electric dipole geometry Radiation from a moving charge in vacuum An accelerated charge in vacuum Angular distribution of radiation during bremsstrahlung Location of radiation during bremsstrahlung Radiation from a charge in circular motion Synchrotron radiation lobe width The perpendicular eld of a moving charge Electron-electron scattering Vavilov-Cerenkov cone Relative motion of two inertial systems Rotation in a 2D Euclidean space Minkowski diagram Linear one-dimensional mass chain
3 5 7 13 77 83 84 86 91 93 98 100 109 110 113 115 117 119 124 137 143 144 164 194
M.1 Tetrahedron-like volume element of matter
xiii
Preface
This book is the result of a more than thirty year long love aair. In 1972, I took my rst advanced course in electrodynamics at the Department of Theoretical Physics, Uppsala University. A year later, I joined the research group there and took on the task of helping professor P ER O LOF F RMAN, who later become my Ph.D. thesis advisor, with the preparation of a new version of his lecture notes on the Theory of Electricity. These two things opened up my eyes for the beauty and intricacy of electrodynamics, already at the classical level, and I fell in love with it. Ever since that time, I have on and o had reason to return to electrodynamics, both in my studies, research and the teaching of a course in advanced electrodynamics at Uppsala University some twenty odd years after I experienced the rst encounter with this subject. The current version of the book is an outgrowth of the lecture notes that I prepared for the four-credit course Electrodynamics that was introduced in the Uppsala University curriculum in 1992, to become the ve-credit course Classical Electrodynamics in 1997. To some extent, parts of these notes were based on lecture notes prepared, in Swedish, by my friend and colleague B ENGT L UNDBORG, who created, developed and taught the earlier, two-credit course Electromagnetic Radiation at our faculty. Intended primarily as a textbook for physics students at the advanced undergraduate or beginning graduate level, it is hoped that the present book may be useful for research workers too. It provides a thorough treatment of the theory of electrodynamics, mainly from a classical eld theoretical point of view, and includes such things as formal electrostatics and magnetostatics and their unication into electrodynamics, the electromagnetic potentials, gauge transformations, covariant formulation of classical electrodynamics, force, momentum and energy of the electromagnetic eld, radiation and scattering phenomena, electromagnetic waves and their propagation in vacuum and in media, and covariant Lagrangian/Hamiltonian eld theoretical methods for electromagnetic elds, particles and interactions. The aim has been to write a book that can serve both as an advanced text in Classical Electrodynamics and as a preparation for studies in Quantum Electrodynamics and related subjects. In an attempt to encourage participation by other scientists and students in the authoring of this book, and to ensure its quality and scope to make it useful
xv
Preface
in higher university education anywhere in the world, it was produced within a World-Wide Web (WWW) project. This turned out to be a rather successful move. By making an electronic version of the book freely down-loadable on the net, comments have been received from fellow Internet physicists around the world and from WWW hit statistics it seems that the book serves as a frequently used Internet resource.1 This way it is hoped that it will be particularly useful for students and researchers working under nancial or other circumstances that make it dicult to procure a printed copy of the book. Thanks are due not only to Bengt Lundborg for providing the inspiration to write this book, but also to professor C HRISTER WAHLBERG and professor G RAN FLDT, Uppsala University, and professor YAKOV I STOMIN, Lebedev Institute, Moscow, for interesting discussions on electrodynamics and relativity in general and on this book in particular. Comments from former graduate students M ATTIAS WALDENVIK, T OBIA C AROZZI and ROGER K ARLSSON as well as A NDERS E RIKS SON , all at the Swedish Institute of Space Physics in Uppsala and who all have participated in the teaching on the material covered in the course and in this book are gratefully acknowledged. Thanks are also due to my long-term space physics colleague H ELMUT KOPKA of the Max-Planck-Institut fr Aeronomie, Lindau, Germany, who not only taught me about the practical aspects of high-power radio wave transmitters and transmission lines, but also about the more delicate aspects A of typesetting a book in TEX and L TEX. I am particularly indebted to Academician professor V ITALIY L AZAREVICH G INZBURG, 2003 Nobel Laureate in Physics, for his many fascinating and very elucidating lectures, comments and historical notes on electromagnetic radiation and cosmic electrodynamics while cruising on the Volga river at our joint Russian-Swedish summer schools during the 1990s, and for numerous private discussions over the years. Finally, I would like to thank all students and Internet users who have downloaded and commented on the book during its life on the World-Wide Web. I dedicate this book to my son M ATTIAS, my daughter K AROLINA, my high-school physics teacher, S TAFFAN RSBY, and to my fellow members of the C APELLA P EDAGOGICA U PSALIENSIS. Uppsala, Sweden December, 2006
B O T HID
www.physics.irfu.se/bt
1 At
the time of publication of this edition, more than 500 000 downloads have been recorded.
xvi
1
Classical Electrodynamics
Classical electrodynamics deals with electric and magnetic elds and interactions caused by macroscopic distributions of electric charges and currents. This means that the concepts of localised electric charges and currents assume the validity of certain mathematical limiting processes in which it is considered possible for the charge and current distributions to be localised in innitesimally small volumes of space. Clearly, this is in contradiction to electromagnetism on a truly microscopic scale, where charges and currents have to be treated as spatially extended objects and quantum corrections must be included. However, the limiting processes used will yield results which are correct on small as well as large macroscopic scales. It took the genius of JAMES C LERK M AXWELL to unify electricity and magnetism into a super-theory, electromagnetism or classical electrodynamics (CED), and to realise that optics is a subeld of this super-theory. Early in the 20th century, H ENDRIK A NTOON L ORENTZ took the electrodynamics theory further to the microscopic scale and also laid the foundation for the special theory of relativity, formulated by A LBERT E INSTEIN in 1905. In the 1930s PAUL A. M. D IRAC expanded electrodynamics to a more symmetric form, including magnetic as well as electric charges. With his relativistic quantum mechanics, he also paved the way for the development of quantum electrodynamics (QED) for which R ICHARD P. F EYNMAN, J ULIAN S CHWINGER, and S IN -I TIRO T OMONAGA in 1965 received their Nobel prizes in physics. Around the same time, physicists such as S HELDON G LASHOW, A BDUS S ALAM, and S TEVEN W EINBERG were able to unify electrodynamics the weak interaction theory to yet another super-theory, electroweak theory, an achievement which rendered them the Nobel prize in physics 1979. The modern theory of strong interactions, quantum chromodynamics (QCD), is inuenced by QED. In this chapter we start with the force interactions in classical electrostatics
1. Classical Electrodynamics
and classical magnetostatics and introduce the static electric and magnetic elds to nd two uncoupled systems of equations for them. Then we see how the conservation of electric charge and its relation to electric current leads to the dynamic connection between electricity and magnetism and how the two can be unied into one super-theory, classical electrodynamics, described by one system of eight coupled dynamic eld equationsthe Maxwell equations. At the end of this chapter we study Diracs symmetrised form of Maxwells equations by introducing (hypothetical) magnetic charges and magnetic currents into the theory. While not identied unambiguously in experiments yet, magnetic charges and currents make the theory much more appealing, for instance by allowing for duality transformations in a most natural way.
1.1 Electrostatics
The theory which describes physical phenomena related to the interaction between stationary electric charges or charge distributions in a nite space which has stationary boundaries is called electrostatics. For a long time, electrostatics, under the name electricity, was considered an independent physical theory of its own, alongside other physical theories such as magnetism, mechanics, optics and thermodynamics.1
1.1.1 Coulombs law

It has been found experimentally that in classical electrostatics the interaction between stationary, electrically charged bodies can be described in terms of a mechanical force. Let us consider the simple case described by gure 1.1 on page 3. Let F denote the force acting on an electrically charged particle with charge q located at x, due to the presence of a charge q located at x . According to Coulombs law this force is, in vacuum, given by the expression F(x) =
1 The
1 qq x x qq = 3 40 |x x | 40 |x x |
qq 40
1 |x x |
(1.1)
physicist and philosopher P IERRE D UHEM (18611916) once wrote:
The whole theory of electrostatics constitutes a group of abstract ideas and general propositions, formulated in the clear and concise language of geometry and algebra, and connected with one another by the rules of strict logic. This whole fully satises the reason of a French physicist and his taste for clarity, simplicity and order. . . .
Electrostatics
q xx x q x
O
F IGURE 1.1: Coulombs law describes how a static electric charge q, located at a point x relative to the origin O, experiences an electrostatic force from a static electric charge q located at x .
where in the last step formula (F.71) on page 181 was used. In SI units, which we shall use throughout, the force F is measured in Newton (N), the electric charges q and q in Coulomb (C) [= Ampre-seconds (As)], and the length |x x | in metres (m). The constant 0 = 107 /(4c2 ) 8.8542 1012 Farad per metre (F/m) is the vacuum permittivity and c 2.9979 108 m/s is the speed of light in vacuum. In CGS units 0 = 1/(4) and the force is measured in dyne, electric charge in statcoulomb, and length in centimetres (cm).
1.1.2 The electrostatic eld

Instead of describing the electrostatic interaction in terms of a force action at a distance, it turns out that it is for most purposes more useful to introduce the concept of a eld and to describe the electrostatic interaction in terms of a static vectorial electric eld Estat dened by the limiting process Estat lim
def
F q0 q
(1.2)
where F is the electrostatic force, as dened in equation (1.1) on page 2, from a net electric charge q on the test particle with a small electric net electric charge q. Since the purpose of the limiting process is to assure that the test charge q does not distort the eld set up by q , the expression for Estat does not depend explicitly on q but only on the charge q and the relative radius vector x x . This means that we can say that any net electric charge produces an electric eld in the space
that surrounds it, regardless of the existence of a second charge anywhere in this space.2 Using (1.1) and equation (1.2) on page 3, and formula (F.70) on page 181, we nd that the electrostatic eld Estat at the eld point x (also known as the observation point), due to a eld-producing electric charge q at the source point x , is given by Estat (x) = q xx q 1 = 40 |x x |3 40 |x x | = q 40 1 |x x | (1.3)
In the presence of several eld producing discrete electric charges qi , located at the points xi , i = 1, 2, 3, . . . , respectively, in an otherwise empty space, the assumption of linearity of vacuum3 allows us to superimpose their individual electrostatic elds into a total electrostatic eld Estat (x) = 1 40
qi
i
x xi x xi
3
(1.4)
If the discrete electric charges are small and numerous enough, we introduce the electric charge density , measured in C/m3 in SI units, located at x within a volume V of limited extent and replace summation with integration over this volume. This allows us to describe the total eld as Estat (x) = 1 1 xx = d3x (x ) 40 V 40 |x x |3 1 (x ) d3x = 40 |x x | V d3x (x )
V
1 |x x |
(1.5)
where we used formula (F.70) on page 181 and the fact that (x ) does not depend on the unprimed (eld point) coordinates on which operates.
2 In the preface to the rst edition of the rst volume of his book A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, rst published in 1873, James Clerk Maxwell describes this in the following almost poetic manner [26]:
For instance, Faraday, in his minds eye, saw lines of force traversing all space where the mathematicians saw centres of force attracting at a distance: Faraday saw a medium where they saw nothing but distance: Faraday sought the seat of the phenomena in real actions going on in the medium, they were satised that they had found it in a power of action at a distance impressed on the electric uids.
3 In fact, vacuum exhibits a quantum mechanical nonlinearity due to vacuum polarisation eects manifesting themselves in the momentary creation and annihilation of electron-positron pairs, but classically this nonlinearity is negligible.
Electrostatics
q x
x xi
qi xi V O
F IGURE 1.2:
Coulombs law for a distribution of individual charges qi localised within a volume V of limited extent.
We emphasise that under the assumption of linear superposition, equation (1.5) on page 4 is valid for an arbitrary distribution of electric charges, including discrete charges, in which case is expressed in terms of Dirac delta distributions: (x ) = qi (x xi )
i
(1.6)
as illustrated in gure 1.2. Inserting this expression into expression (1.5) on page 4 we recover expression (1.4) on page 4. Taking the divergence of the general Estat expression for an arbitrary electric charge distribution, equation (1.5) on page 4, and using the representation of the Dirac delta distribution, formula (F.73) on page 181, we nd that Estat (x) = 1 xx d3x (x ) 40 V |x x |3 1 1 = d3x (x ) 40 V |x x | 1 1 = d3x (x ) 2 40 V x x| | 1 (x) = d3x (x ) (x x ) = 0 V 0
(1.7)
which is the dierential form of Gausss law of electrostatics. Since, according to formula (F.62) on page 181, [(x)] 0 for any 3D
R3 scalar eld (x), we immediately nd that in electrostatics

Estat (x) = 1 40 d3x
V
(x ) |x x |
=0
(1.8)
i.e., that Estat is an irrotational eld. To summarise, electrostatics can be described in terms of two vector partial dierential equations (x) 0 stat E (x) = 0 Estat (x) = representing four scalar partial dierential equations. (1.9a) (1.9b)
1.2 Magnetostatics
While electrostatics deals with static electric charges, magnetostatics deals with stationary electric currents, i.e., electric charges moving with constant speeds, and the interaction between these currents. Here we shall discuss this theory in some detail.
1.2.1 Ampres law

Experiments on the interaction between two small loops of electric current have shown that they interact via a mechanical force, much the same way that electric charges interact. In gure 1.3 on page 7, let F denote such a force acting on a small loop C , with tangential line element dl, located at x and carrying a current I in the direction of dl, due to the presence of a small loop C , with tangential line element dl , located at x and carrying a current I in the direction of dl . According to Ampres law this force is, in vacuum, given by the expression F(x) = 0 II 4 0 II = 4 dl
C C
dl
xx |x x |3 1 |x x |
(1.10)
dl
C C
dl
In SI units, 0 = 4 107 1.2566 106 H/m is the vacuum permeability. From the denition of 0 and 0 (in SI units) we observe that 0 0 = 1 107 (F/m) 4 107 (H/m) = 2 (s2 /m2 ) 4c2 c (1.11)
Magnetostatics
C I dl x C x xx I dl
O
F IGURE 1.3: Ampres law describes how a small loop C , carrying a static electric current I through its tangential line element dl located at x, experiences a magnetostatic force from a small loop C , carrying a static electric current I through the tangential line element dl located at x . The loops can have arbitrary shapes as long as they are simple and closed.
which is a most useful relation. At rst glance, equation (1.10) on page 6 may appear unsymmetric in terms of the loops and therefore to be a force law which is in contradiction with Newtons third law. However, by applying the vector triple product bac-cab formula (F.51) on page 180, we can rewrite (1.10) as F(x) = 0 II 4 0 II 4 dl
C C
dl
1 |x x |
xx dl dl |x x |3
(1.12)
Since the integrand in the rst integral is an exact dierential, this integral vanishes and we can rewrite the force expression, equation (1.10) on page 6, in the following symmetric way F(x) = 0 II 4
C C
xx dl dl |x x |3
(1.13)
which clearly exhibits the expected symmetry in terms of loops C and C .
1.2.2 The magnetostatic eld

In analogy with the electrostatic case, we may attribute the magnetostatic interaction to a static vectorial magnetic eld Bstat . It turns out that the elemental Bstat
can be dened as dBstat (x)

def
xx 0 I dl 4 |x x |3
(1.14)
which expresses the small element dBstat (x) of the static magnetic eld set up at the eld point x by a small line element dl of stationary current I at the source point x . The SI unit for the magnetic eld, sometimes called the magnetic ux density or magnetic induction, is Tesla (T). If we generalise expression (1.14) to an integrated steady state electric current density j(x), measured in A/m2 in SI units, we obtain Biot-Savarts law: Bstat (x) = 0 xx 0 d3x j(x ) = 3 4 V 4 |x x | 0 j ( x ) = d3x 4 |x x | V d3x j(x )
V
1 |x x |
(1.15)
where we used formula (F.70) on page 181, formula (F.57) on page 181, and the fact that j(x ) does not depend on the unprimed coordinates on which operates. Comparing equation (1.5) on page 4 with equation (1.15), we see that there exists a close analogy between the expressions for Estat and Bstat but that they dier in their vectorial characteristics. With this denition of Bstat , equation (1.10) on page 6 may we written F(x) = I dl Bstat (x)
C
(1.16)
In order to assess the properties of Bstat , we determine its divergence and curl. Taking the divergence of both sides of equation (1.15) and utilising formula (F.63) on page 181, we obtain Bstat (x) = 0 4 d3x
V
j(x ) |x x |
=0
(1.17)
since, according to formula (F.63) on page 181, ( a) vanishes for any vector eld a(x). Applying the operator bac-cab rule, formula (F.64) on page 181, the curl of equation (1.15) can be written Bstat (x) = = 0 4 0 4 j(x ) = |x x | 0 1 1 + d3x [j(x ) ] 4 V |x x | |x x | (1.18) d3x
V
d3x j(x ) 2
V
Electrodynamics
In the rst of the two integrals on the right-hand side, we use the representation of the Dirac delta function given in formula (F.73) on page 181, and integrate the second one by parts, by utilising formula (F.56) on page 181 as follows: 1 |x x | V 1 =x k d3x j(x ) xk |x x | V 1 d3x j(x ) |x x | V 1 =x k d2x n j(x ) x x| x | S k d3x [j(x ) ]
d3x j(x )
V
1 |x x | (1.19)
Then we note that the rst integral in the result, obtained by applying Gausss theorem, vanishes when integrated over a large sphere far away from the localised source j(x ), and that the second integral vanishes because j = 0 for stationary currents (no charge accumulation in space). The net result is simply Bstat (x) = 0 d3x j(x )(x x ) = 0 j(x) (1.20)
1.3 Electrodynamics
As we saw in the previous sections, the laws of electrostatics and magnetostatics can be summarised in two pairs of time-independent, uncoupled vector partial dierential equations, namely the equations of classical electrostatics (x) 0 Estat (x) = 0 Estat (x) = and the equations of classical magnetostatics Bstat (x) = 0 B
stat
(1.21a) (1.21b)
(1.22a) (1.22b)
(x) = 0 j(x)
Since there is nothing a priori which connects Estat directly with Bstat , we must consider classical electrostatics and classical magnetostatics as two independent theories.
However, when we include time-dependence, these theories are unied into one theory, classical electrodynamics. This unication of the theories of electricity and magnetism is motivated by two empirically established facts: 1. Electric charge is a conserved quantity and electric current is a transport of electric charge. This fact manifests itself in the equation of continuity and, as a consequence, in Maxwells displacement current. 2. A change in the magnetic ux through a loop will induce an EMF electric eld in the loop. This is the celebrated Faradays law of induction.
1.3.1 Equation of continuity for electric charge

Let j(t, x) denote the time-dependent electric current density. In the simplest case it can be dened as j = v where v is the velocity of the electric charge density . In general, j has to be dened in statistical mechanical terms as j(t, x) = q d3v v f (t, x, v) where f (t, x, v) is the (normalised) distribution function for particle species with electric charge q . The electric charge conservation law can be formulated in the equation of continuity (t, x) + j(t, x) = 0 t (1.23)
which states that the time rate of change of electric charge (t, x) is balanced by a divergence in the electric current density j(t, x).
1.3.2 Maxwells displacement current

We recall from the derivation of equation (1.20) on page 9 that there we used the fact that in magnetostatics j(x) = 0. In the case of non-stationary sources and elds, we must, in accordance with the continuity equation (1.23), set j(t, x) = (t, x)/t. Doing so, and formally repeating the steps in the derivation of equation (1.20) on page 9, we would obtain the formal result B(t, x) = 0 d3x j(t, x )(x x ) + 0 4 t d3x (t, x )
V
1 |x x |
= 0 j(t, x) + 0 0 E(t, x) t
(1.24)
10
Electrodynamics
where, in the last step, we have assumed that a generalisation of equation (1.5) on page 4 to time-varying elds allows us to make the identication4 1 1 d3x (t, x ) 40 t V |x x | 1 1 d3x (t, x ) = t 40 V |x x | (t, x ) 1 = d3x = E(t, x) t 40 t |x x | V The result is Maxwells source equation for the B eld B(t, x) = 0 j(t, x) + 0 E(t, x) t = 0 j(t, x) + 1 E(t, x) c2 t (1.26)
(1.25)
where the last term 0 E(t, x)/t is the famous displacement current. This term was introduced, in a stroke of genius, by Maxwell [25] in order to make the right hand side of this equation divergence free when j(t, x) is assumed to represent the density of the total electric current, which can be split up in ordinary conduction currents, polarisation currents and magnetisation currents. The displacement current is an extra term which behaves like a current density owing in vacuum. As we shall see later, its existence has far-reaching physical consequences as it predicts the existence of electromagnetic radiation that can carry energy and momentum over very long distances, even in vacuum.
1.3.3 Electromotive force

If an electric eld E(t, x) is applied to a conducting medium, a current density j(t, x) will be produced in this medium. There exist also hydrodynamical and chemical processes which can create currents. Under certain physical conditions, and for certain materials, one can sometimes assume, that, as a rst approximation, a linear relationship exists between the electric current density j and E. This approximation is called Ohms law: j(t, x) = E(t, x) (1.27)
where is the electric conductivity (S/m). In the most general cases, for instance in an anisotropic conductor, is a tensor. We can view Ohms law, equation (1.27) above, as the rst term in a Taylor expansion of the law j[E(t, x)]. This general law incorporates non-linear eects
4 Later,
we will need to consider this generalisation and formal identication further.
11
such as frequency mixing. Examples of media which are highly non-linear are semiconductors and plasma. We draw the attention to the fact that even in cases when the linear relation between E and j is a good approximation, we still have to use Ohms law with care. The conductivity is, in general, time-dependent (temporal dispersive media) but then it is often the case that equation (1.27) on page 11 is valid for each individual Fourier component of the eld. If the current is caused by an applied electric eld E(t, x), this electric eld will exert work on the charges in the medium and, unless the medium is superconducting, there will be some energy loss. The rate at which this energy is expended is j E per unit volume. If E is irrotational (conservative), j will decay away with time. Stationary currents therefore require that an electric eld which corresponds to an electromotive force (EMF) is present. In the presence of such a eld EEMF , Ohms law, equation (1.27) on page 11, takes the form j = (Estat + EEMF ) The electromotive force is dened as E=
C
(1.28)
dl (Estat + EEMF )
(1.29)
where dl is a tangential line element of the closed loop C .
1.3.4 Faradays law of induction

In subsection 1.1.2 we derived the dierential equations for the electrostatic eld. In particular, on page 6 we derived equation (1.8) which states that Estat (x) = 0 and thus that Estat is a conservative eld (it can be expressed as a gradient of a scalar eld). This implies that the closed line integral of Estat in equation (1.29) above vanishes and that this equation becomes E= dl EEMF
C
(1.30)
It has been established experimentally that a nonconservative EMF eld is produced in a closed circuit C if the magnetic ux through this circuit varies with time. This is formulated in Faradays law which, in Maxwells generalised form, reads E(t, x) = dl E(t, x) =
S
d m (t, x) dt d2x n
S
d dt
d2x n B(t, x) =
B(t, x) t
(1.31)
12
Electrodynamics
B(x) d2x n
B(x)
C dl
F IGURE 1.4:
A loop C which moves with velocity v in a spatially varying magnetic eld B(x) will sense a varying magnetic ux during the motion.
where m is the magnetic ux and S is the surface encircled by C which can be interpreted as a generic stationary loop and not necessarily as a conducting circuit. Application of Stokes theorem on this integral equation, transforms it into the dierential equation E(t, x) = B(t, x) t (1.32)
which is valid for arbitrary variations in the elds and constitutes the Maxwell equation which explicitly connects electricity with magnetism. Any change of the magnetic ux m will induce an EMF. Let us therefore consider the case, illustrated if gure 1.4, that the loop is moved in such a way that it links a magnetic eld which varies during the movement. The convective derivative is evaluated according to the well-known operator formula d = +v dt t
(1.33)
which follows immediately from the rules of dierentiation of an arbitrary dierentiable function f (t, x(t)). Applying this rule to Faradays law, equation (1.31) on page 12, we obtain E(t, x) = d dt d2x n B= d2x n
S
B t
d2x n (v )B
S
(1.34)
13
During spatial dierentiation v is to be considered as constant, and equation (1.17) on page 8 holds also for time-varying elds: B(t, x) = 0 (1.35)
(it is one of Maxwells equations) so that, according to formula (F.59) on page 181, (B v) = (v )B allowing us to rewrite equation (1.34) on page 13 in the following way: E(t, x) =
C
(1.36)
dl EEMF =
2
d dt
S
d2x n B
S
B = dxn t S
(1.37)
2
dxn (B v)
With Stokes theorem applied to the last integral, we nally get E(t, x) = dl EEMF = d2x n
S
B t B t
dl (B v)
C
(1.38)
or, rearranging the terms, dl (EEMF v B) = d2x n

S
(1.39)
where EEMF is the eld which is induced in the loop, i.e., in the moving system. The use of Stokes theorem backwards on equation (1.39) above yields (EEMF v B) = B t (1.40)
In the xed system, an observer measures the electric eld E = EEMF v B (1.41)
Hence, a moving observer measures the following Lorentz force on a charge q qEEMF = qE + q(v B) (1.42)
corresponding to an eective electric eld in the loop (moving observer) EEMF = E + v B (1.43)
Hence, we can conclude that for a stationary observer, the Maxwell equation E= B t (1.44)
is indeed valid even if the loop is moving.
14
Electrodynamics
1.3.5 Maxwells microscopic equations

We are now able to collect the results from the above considerations and formulate the equations of classical electrodynamics valid for arbitrary variations in time and space of the coupled electric and magnetic elds E(t, x) and B(t, x). The equations are (1.45a) E= 0 B E= (1.45b) t B=0 (1.45c) E B = 0 0 + 0 j(t, x) (1.45d) t In these equations (t, x) represents the total, possibly both time and space dependent, electric charge, i.e., free as well as induced (polarisation) charges, and j(t, x) represents the total, possibly both time and space dependent, electric current, i.e., conduction currents (motion of free charges) as well as all atomistic (polarisation, magnetisation) currents. As they stand, the equations therefore incorporate the classical interaction between all electric charges and currents in the system and are called Maxwells microscopic equations. Another name often used for them is the Maxwell-Lorentz equations. Together with the appropriate constitutive relations, which relate and j to the elds, and the initial and boundary conditions pertinent to the physical situation at hand, they form a system of well-posed partial dierential equations which completely determine E and B.
1.3.6 Maxwells macroscopic equations

The microscopic eld equations (1.45) provide a correct classical picture for arbitrary eld and source distributions, including both microscopic and macroscopic scales. However, for macroscopic substances it is sometimes convenient to introduce new derived elds which represent the electric and magnetic elds in which, in an average sense, the material properties of the substances are already included. These elds are the electric displacement D and the magnetising eld H. In the most general case, these derived elds are complicated nonlocal, nonlinear functionals of the primary elds E and B: D = D[t, x; E, B] H = H[t, x; E, B] (1.46a) (1.46b)
Under certain conditions, for instance for very low eld strengths, we may assume that the response of a substance to the elds may be approximated as a linear one
15
so that D = E H= B
1
(1.47) (1.48)
i.e., that the derived elds are linearly proportional to the primary elds and that the electric displacement (magnetising eld) is only dependent on the electric (magnetic) eld. The eld equations expressed in terms of the derived eld quantities D and H are D = (t, x) B E= t B=0 D + j(t, x) H= t (1.49a) (1.49b) (1.49c) (1.49d)
and are called Maxwells macroscopic equations. We will study them in more detail in chapter 4.
1.4 Electromagnetic duality

If we look more closely at the microscopic Maxwell equations (1.45), we see that they exhibit a certain, albeit not complete, symmetry. Let us follow Dirac and make the ad hoc assumption that there exist magnetic monopoles represented by a magnetic charge density, which we denote by m = m (t, x), and a magnetic current density, which we denote by jm = jm (t, x). With these new quantities included in the theory, and with the electric charge density denoted e and the electric current density denoted je , the Maxwell equations will be symmetrised into the following two scalar and two vector, coupled, partial dierential equations: E= e 0 (1.50a) (1.50b) (1.50c) (1.50d)
B 0 jm t B = 0 m E B = 0 0 + 0 je t E=
16
Electromagnetic duality
We shall call these equations Diracs symmetrised Maxwell equations or the electromagnetodynamic equations. Taking the divergence of (1.50b), we nd that ( E) = ( B) 0 jm 0 t (1.51)
where we used the fact that, according to formula (F.63) on page 181, the divergence of a curl always vanishes. Using (1.50c) to rewrite this relation, we obtain the magnetic monopole equation of continuity m + jm = 0 t (1.52)
which has the same form as that for the electric monopoles (electric charges) and currents, equation (1.23) on page 10. We notice that the new equations (1.50) on page 16 exhibit the following symmetry (recall that 0 0 = 1/c2 ): E cB cB E c
e m e m e
(1.53a) (1.53b) (1.53c) (1.53d) (1.53e)

e
c cj j
m m
j cj
(1.53f)
which is a particular case ( = /2) of the general duality transformation, also known as the Heaviside-Larmor-Rainich transformation (indicted by the Hodge star operator ) E = E cos + cB sin c B = E sin + cB cos c = c cos + sin
e e m
(1.54a) (1.54b) (1.54c) (1.54d) (1.54e) (1.54f)
= c sin + cos
m e e m
c j = cj cos + j sin
e m
j = cj sin + j cos
m e m
which leaves the symmetrised Maxwell equations, and hence the physics they describe (often referred to as electromagnetodynamics), invariant. Since E and je are (true or polar) vectors, B a pseudovector (axial vector), e a (true) scalar, then m and , which behaves as a mixing angle in a two-dimensional charge space, must be pseudoscalars and jm a pseudovector.
17
The invariance of Diracs symmetrised Maxwell equations under the similarity transformation means that the amount of magnetic monopole density m is irrelevant for the physics as long as the ratio m /e = tan is kept constant. So whether we assume that the particles are only electrically charged or have also a magnetic charge with a given, xed ratio between the two types of charges is a matter of convention, as long as we assume that this fraction is the same for all particles. Such particles are referred to as dyons [35]. By varying the mixing angle we can change the fraction of magnetic monopoles at will without changing the laws of electrodynamics. For = 0 we recover the usual Maxwell electrodynamics as we know it.5
1.5 Bibliography
[1] [2] [3] [4]
J. A HARONI, The Special Theory of Relativity, second, revised ed., Dover Publications, Inc., New York, 1985, ISBN 0-486-64870-2. H. A LFVN
AND
N. H ERLOFSON, Cosmic radiation and radio stars, Physical Review, 78
(1950), p. 616.
G. B. A RFKEN AND H. J. W EBER, Mathematical Methods for Physicists, fourth, international ed., Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, CA . . . , 1995, ISBN 0-12-059816-7. T. W. BARRETT AND D. M. G RIMES, Advanced Electromagnetism. Foundations, Theory and Applications, World Scientic Publishing Co., Singapore, 1995, ISBN 981-02-20952. A. O. BARUT, Electrodynamics and Classical Theory of Fields and Particles, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1980, ISBN 0-486-64038-8. R. B ECKER, Electromagnetic Fields and Interactions, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1982, ISBN 0-486-64290-9. D. B OHM, The Special Theory of Relativity, Routledge, New York, NY, 1996, ISBN 0415-14809-X. M. B ORN AND E. W OLF, Principles of Optics. Electromagnetic Theory of Propagation, Interference and Diraction of Light, sixth ed., Pergamon Press, Oxford,. . . , 1980, ISBN 0-08-026481-6.
5 As
[5] [6] [7] [8]
Julian Schwinger (19181994) put it [36]:
. . . there are strong theoretical reasons to believe that magnetic charge exists in nature, and may have played an important role in the development of the universe. Searches for magnetic charge continue at the present time, emphasising that electromagnetism is very far from being a closed object.
18
Bibliography
[9]
W. E. B RITTIN , W. R. S MYTHE , AND W. W YSS, Poincar gauge in electrodynamics, American Journal of Physics, 50 (1982), pp. 693696.
[10] R. A. D EAN, Elements of Abstract Algebra, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1967, ISBN 0-471-20452-8. [11] A. A. E VETT, Permutation symbol approach to elementary vector analysis, American Journal of Physics, 34 (1965), pp. 503507. [12] L. D. FADEEV AND A. A. S LAVNOV, Gauge Fields: Introduction to Quantum Theory, No. 50 in Frontiers in Physics: A Lecture Note and Reprint Series. Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1980, ISBN 0-8053-9016-2. [13] V. L. G INZBURG, Applications of Electrodynamics in Theoretical Physics and Astrophysics, Revised third ed., Gordon and Breach Science Publishers, New York, London, Paris, Montreux, Tokyo and Melbourne, 1989, ISBN 2-88124-719-9. [14] H. G OLDSTEIN, Classical Mechanics, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1981, ISBN 0-201-02918-9. [15] W. T. G RANDY, Introduction to Electrodynamics and Radiation, Academic Press, New York and London, 1970, ISBN 0-12-295250-2. [16] W. G REINER, Classical Electrodynamics, Springer-Verlag, New York, Berlin, Heidelberg, 1996, ISBN 0-387-94799-X. [17] M. G UIDRY, Gauge Field Theories: An Introduction with Applications, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1991, ISBN 0-471-63117-5. [18] E. H ALLN, Electromagnetic Theory, Chapman & Hall, Ltd., London, 1962. [19] F. H OYLE , S IR AND J. V. NARLIKAR, Lectures on Cosmology and Action at a Distance Electrodynamics, World Scientic Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd, Singapore, New Jersey, London and Hong Kong, 1996, ISBN 9810-02-2573-3(pbk). [20] J. D. JACKSON, Classical Electrodynamics, third ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1999, ISBN 0-471-30932-X. [21] L. D. L ANDAU AND E. M. L IFSHITZ, The Classical Theory of Fields, fourth revised English ed., vol. 2 of Course of Theoretical Physics, Pergamon Press, Ltd., Oxford . . . , 1975, ISBN 0-08-025072-6. [22] L. L ORENZ, Philosophical Magazine (1867), pp. 287301. [23] F. E. L OW, Classical Field Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1997, ISBN 0-471-59551-9. [24] J. B. M ARION AND M. A. H EALD, Classical Electromagnetic Radiation, second ed., Academic Press, Inc. (London) Ltd., Orlando, . . . , 1980, ISBN 0-12-472257-1. [25] J. C. M AXWELL, A dynamical theory of the electromagnetic eld, Royal Society Transactions, 155 (1864).
19
[26] J. C. M AXWELL, A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, third ed., vol. 1, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1954, ISBN 0-486-60636-8. [27] J. C. M AXWELL, A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, third ed., vol. 2, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1954, ISBN 0-486-60637-8. [28] D. B. M ELROSE AND R. C. M C P HEDRAN, Electromagnetic Processes in Dispersive Media, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge . . . , 1991, ISBN 0-521-41025-8. [29] P. M. M ORSE AND H. F ESHBACH, Methods of Theoretical Physics, Part I. McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1953, ISBN 07-043316-8. [30] H. M UIRHEAD, The Special Theory of Relativity, The Macmillan Press Ltd., London, Beccles and Colchester, 1973, ISBN 333-12845-1. [31] C. M LLER, The Theory of Relativity, second ed., Oxford University Press, Glasgow . . . , 1972. [32] W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026. [33] F. ROHRLICH, Classical Charged Particles, Perseus Books Publishing, L.L.C., Reading, MA . . . , 1990, ISBN 0-201-48300-9. [34] J. J. S AKURAI, Advanced Quantum Mechanics, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1967, ISBN 0-201-06710-2. [35] J. S CHWINGER, A magnetic model of matter, Science, 165 (1969), pp. 757761. [36] J. S CHWINGER , L. L. D E R AAD , J R ., K. A. M ILTON , AND W. T SAI, Classical Electrodynamics, Perseus Books, Reading, MA, 1998, ISBN 0-7382-0056-5. [37] D. E. S OPER, Classical Field Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, London, Sydney and Toronto, 1976, ISBN 0-471-81368-0. [38] B. S PAIN, Tensor Calculus, third ed., Oliver and Boyd, Ltd., Edinburgh and London, 1965, ISBN 05-001331-9. [39] J. A. S TRATTON, Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY and London, 1953, ISBN 07-062150-0. [40] W. E. T HIRRING, Classical Mathematical Physics, Springer-Verlag, New York, Vienna, 1997, ISBN 0-387-94843-0. [41] J. VANDERLINDE, Classical Electromagnetic Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, Chichester, Brisbane, Toronto, and Singapore, 1993, ISBN 0-471-57269-1. [42] J. A. W HEELER AND R. P. F EYNMAN, Interaction with the absorber as a mechanism for radiation, Reviews of Modern Physics, 17 (1945), pp. 157. [43] A. N. W HITEHEAD, Concept of Nature, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge . . . , 1920, ISBN 0-521-09245-0.
20
Examples
1.6 Examples
FARADAY S LAW
AS A CONSEQUENCE OF CONSERVATION OF MAGNETIC CHARGE
E XAMPLE 1.1
Postulate 1.1 (Indestructibility of magnetic charge). Magnetic charge exists and is indestructible in the same way that electric charge exists and is indestructible. In other words we postulate that there exists an equation of continuity for magnetic charges: m (t, x) + jm (t, x) = 0 t Use this postulate and Diracs symmetrised form of Maxwells equations to derive Faradays law. The assumption of the existence of magnetic charges suggests a Coulomb-like law for magnetic elds: Bstat (x) = 0 xx 0 d3x m (x ) = 4 V 4 |x x |3 m (x ) 0 = d3x 4 |x x | V d3x m (x )
V
1 |x x |
(1.55)
[cf. equation (1.5) on page 4 for Estat ] and, if magnetic currents exist, a Biot-Savart-like law for electric elds [cf. equation (1.15) on page 8 for Bstat ]: Estat (x) = xx 0 0 d3x jm (x ) = 4 V 4 |x x |3 0 jm (x ) = d3x 4 |x x | V d3x jm (x )
V
1 |x x |
(1.56)
Taking the curl of the latter and using the operator bac-cab rule, formula (F.59) on page 181, we nd that Estat (x) = 0 = 4 0 4 d3x
V
d3x jm (x )2
V
1 |x x |
jm (x ) = |x x | 0 d3x [jm (x ) ] 4 V
1 |x x |
(1.57)
Comparing with equation (1.18) on page 8 for Estat and the evaluation of the integrals there, we obtain Estat (x) = 0
V
d3x jm (x ) (x x ) = 0 jm (x)
(1.58)
We assume that formula (1.56) above is valid also for time-varying magnetic currents. Then, with the use of the representation of the Dirac delta function, equation (F.73) on page 181, the equation of continuity for magnetic charge, equation (1.52) on page 17, and the assumption of the generalisation of equation (1.55) to time-dependent magnetic charge distributions, we obtain, formally,
21
E(t, x) = 0
d3x jm (t, x )(x x )

V m
0 4 t
d3x m (t, x )
V
1 |x x |
= 0 j (t, x) B(t, x) t
(1.59)
[cf. equation (1.24) on page 10] which we recognise as equation (1.50b) on page 16. A transformation of this electromagnetodynamic result by rotating into the electric realm of charge space, thereby letting jm tend to zero, yields the electrodynamic equation (1.50b) on page 16, i.e., the Faraday law in the ordinary Maxwell equations. This process also provides an alternative interpretation of the term B/t as a magnetic displacement current, dual to the electric displacement current [cf. equation (1.26) on page 11]. By postulating the indestructibility of a hypothetical magnetic charge, we have thereby been able to replace Faradays experimental results on electromotive forces and induction in loops as a foundation for the Maxwell equations by a more appealing one.
E ND OF EXAMPLE 1.1
E XAMPLE 1.2
D UALITY
OF THE ELECTROMAGNETODYNAMIC EQUATIONS
Show that the symmetric, electromagnetodynamic form of Maxwells equations (Diracs symmetrised Maxwell equations), equations (1.50) on page 16, are invariant under the duality transformation (1.54). Explicit application of the transformation yields e cos + c0 m sin 0 1 1 e = e cos + m sin = 0 c 0 1 B = (E cos + cB sin ) + E sin + B cos E+ t t c B 1 E = 0 jm cos cos + c0 je sin + sin t c t 1 E B sin + cos = 0 jm cos + c0 je sin c t t = 0 (cje sin + jm cos ) = 0 jm e 1 sin + 0 m cos B = ( E sin + B cos ) = c c0 = 0 (ce sin + m cos ) = 0 m E = (E cos + cB sin ) =
(1.60)
(1.61)
(1.62)
22
Examples
1 E 1 1 = ( E sin + B cos ) 2 (E cos + cB sin ) c2 t c c t 1 1 B 1 E = 0 jm sin + cos + 0 je cos + 2 cos c c t c t 1 E 1 B 2 cos sin c t c t 1 m = 0 j sin + je cos = 0 je c
(1.63)
QED
E ND OF EXAMPLE 1.2
D IRAC S SYMMETRISED M AXWELL EQUATIONS FOR
A FIXED MIXING ANGLE
E XAMPLE 1.3
Show that for a xed mixing angle such that m = ce tan j = cj tan
m e
(1.64a) (1.64b)
the symmetrised Maxwell equations reduce to the usual Maxwell equations. Explicit application of the xed mixing angle conditions on the duality transformation (1.54) on page 17 yields 1 1 e = e cos + m sin = e cos + ce tan sin c c 1 1 e 2 e 2 e = ( cos + sin ) = cos cos m = ce sin + ce tan cos = ce sin + ce sin = 0 1 1 e je = je cos + je tan sin = (je cos2 + je sin2 ) = j cos cos jm = cje sin + cje tan cos = cje sin + cje sin = 0 (1.65a) (1.65b) (1.65c) (1.65d)
Hence, a xed mixing angle, or, equivalently, a xed ratio between the electric and magnetic charges/currents, hides the magnetic monopole inuence (m and jm ) on the dynamic equations. We notice that the inverse of the transformation given by equation (1.54) on page 17 yields E = E cos c B sin This means that E = E cos c B sin (1.67) (1.66)
Furthermore, from the expressions for the transformed charges and currents above, we nd that E= e 1 e = 0 cos 0 (1.68)
23
and B = 0 m = 0 so that E= e 1 e cos 0 = cos 0 0 (1.70) QED

E ND OF EXAMPLE 1.3
(1.69)
and so on for the other equations.
E XAMPLE 1.4
C OMPLEX
FIELD SIX - VECTOR FORMALISM
It is sometimes convenient to introduce the complex eld six-vector, also known as the Riemann-Silberstein vector G(t, x) = E(t, x) + icB(t, x)
3 3 3
(1.71)
where E, B R and hence G C . One fundamental property of C is that inner (scalar) products in this space are invariant just as they are in R3 . However, as discussed in example M.3 on page 197, the inner (scalar) product in C3 can be dened in two dierent ways. Considering the special case of the scalar product of G with itself, we have the following two possibilities of dening (the square of) the length of G: 1. The inner (scalar) product dened as G scalar multiplied with itself G G = (E + icB) (E + icB) = E 2 c2 B2 + 2icE B Since this is an invariant scalar quantity, we nd that E 2 c2 B2 = Const E B = Const (1.73a) (1.73b) (1.72)
2. The inner (scalar) product dened as G scalar multiplied with the complex conjugate of itself G G = (E + icB) (E icB) = E 2 + c2 B2 (1.74)
which is also an invariant scalar quantity. As we shall see later, this quantity is proportional to the electromagnetic eld energy, which indeed is a conserved quantity. 3. As with any vector, the cross product of G with itself vanishes: G G = (E + icB) (E + icB) = E E c2 B B + ic(E B) + ic(B E) = 0 + 0 + ic(E B) ic(E B) = 0 4. The cross product of G with the complex conjugate of itself (1.75)
24
Examples
G G = (E + icB) (E icB) = E E + c2 B B ic(E B) + ic(B E) = 0 + 0 ic(E B) ic(E B) = 2ic(E B) is proportional to the electromagnetic power ux, to be introduced later.
E ND OF EXAMPLE 1.4
(1.76)
D UALITY
EXPRESSED IN THE COMPLEX FIELD SIX - VECTOR
E XAMPLE 1.5
Expressed in the Riemann-Silberstein complex eld vector, introduced in example 1.4 on page 24, the duality transformation equations (1.54) on page 17 become G = E + ic B = E cos + cB sin iE sin + icB cos = E(cos i sin ) + icB(cos i sin ) = ei (E + icB) = ei G from which it is easy to see that G G = while G G = e2i G G (1.79) G
2
(1.77)
= ei G ei G = |G|2
(1.78)
Furthermore, assuming that = (t, x), we see that the spatial and temporal dierentiation of G leads to G = i(t )ei G + ei t G t G G = iei G + ei G t G G G = ie G + e G
i i
(1.80a) (1.80b) (1.80c)
which means that t G transforms as G itself only if is time-independent, and that G and G transform as G itself only if is space-independent.
E ND OF EXAMPLE 1.5
25
2
Electromagnetic Waves
In this chapter we investigate the dynamical properties of the electromagnetic eld by deriving a set of equations which are alternatives to the Maxwell equations. It turns out that these alternative equations are wave equations, indicating that electromagnetic waves are natural and common manifestations of electrodynamics. Maxwells microscopic equations [cf. equations (1.45) on page 15] are E= (t, x) 0 B E= t B=0 E B = 0 j(t, x) + 0 0 t (Gausss law) (Faradays law) (No free magnetic charges) (Maxwells law) (2.1a) (2.1b) (2.1c) (2.1d)
and can be viewed as an axiomatic basis for classical electrodynamics. They describe, in scalar and vector dierential equation form, the electric and magnetic elds E and B produced by given, prescribed charge distributions (t, x) and current distributions j(t, x) with arbitrary time and space dependences. However, as is well known from the theory of dierential equations, these four rst order, coupled partial dierential vector equations can be rewritten as two uncoupled, second order partial equations, one for E and one for B. We shall derive these second order equations which, as we shall see are wave equations, and then discuss the implications of them. We show that for certain media, the B wave eld can be easily obtained from the solution of the E wave equation.
27
2. Electromagnetic Waves
2.1 The wave equations

We restrict ourselves to derive the wave equations for the electric eld vector E and the magnetic eld vector B in an electrically neutral region, i.e., a volume where there is no net charge, = 0, and no electromotive force EEMF = 0.
2.1.1 The wave equation for E

In order to derive the wave equation for E we take the curl of (2.1b) and use (2.1d), to obtain ( E) = ( B) = 0 t t j + 0 E t (2.2)
According to the operator triple product bac-cab rule equation (F.64) on page 181 ( E) = ( E) 2 E Furthermore, since = 0, equation (2.1a) on page 27 yields E=0 (2.4) (2.3)
and since EEMF = 0, Ohms law, equation (1.28) on page 12, allows us to use the approximation j = E we nd that equation (2.2) above can be rewritten 2 E 0 t E + 0 E t =0 (2.6) (2.5)
or, also using equation (1.11) on page 6 and rearranging, 2 E 0 E 1 2 E 2 2 =0 t c t (2.7)
which is the homogeneous wave equation for E in a uncharged, conducting medium without EMF. For waves propagating in vacuum (no charges, no currents), the wave equation for E is 2 E 1 2 E = c2 t2
2
E=0
(2.8)
where 2 is the dAlembert operator, dened according to formula (M.93) on page 199.
28
The wave equations
2.1.2 The wave equation for B

The wave equation for B is derived in much the same way as the wave equation for E. Take the curl of (2.1d) and use Ohms law j = E to obtain ( B) = 0 j + 0 0 ( E) = 0 E + 0 0 ( E) t t (2.9)
which, with the use of equation (F.64) on page 181 and equation (2.1c) on page 27 can be rewritten ( B) 2 B = 0 B 2 0 0 2 B t t (2.10)
Using the fact that, according to (2.1c), B = 0 for any medium and rearranging, we can rewrite this equation as 2 B 0 B 1 2 B 2 2 =0 t c t (2.11)
This is the wave equation for the magnetic eld. For waves propagating in vacuum (no charges, no currents), the wave equation for B is 2 B 1 2 B = c2 t2
2
B=0
(2.12)
We notice that for the simple propagation media considered here, the wave equations for the magnetic eld B has exactly the same mathematical form as the wave equation for the electric eld E, equation (2.7) on page 28. Therefore, it sufces to consider only the E eld, since the results for the B eld follow trivially. For EM waves propagating in more complicated media, containing, eg., inhomogeneities, the wave equation for E and for B do not have the same mathematical form.
2.1.3 The time-independent wave equation for E

If we assume that the temporal dependence of E (and B) is well-behaved enough that it can be represented by a sum of a nite number of temporal spectral (Fourier) components, i.e., in the form of a temporal Fourier series, then it is sucient to represent the electric eld by one of these Fourier components E(t, x) = E0 (x) cos(t) = E0 (x)Re eit (2.13)
since the general solution is obtained by a linear superposition (summation) of the result for one such spectral (Fourier) component, often called a time-harmonic
29
wave. When we insert this, in complex notation, into equation (2.7) on page 28 we nd that 2 E0 (x)eit 0 1 2 E0 (x)eit 2 2 E0 (x)eit t c t 1 2 it = E0 (x)e 0 (i)E0 (x)eit 2 (i)2 E0 (x)eit c (2.14)
or, dividing out the common factor eit and rewriting, 2 E0 + 2 c2 1+i 0 E0 = 0 (2.15)
Multiplying by eit and introducing the relaxation time = 0 / of the medium in question, we see that the dierential equation for the time-harmonic wave can be written 2 E(t, x) + 2 c2 1+ i E(t, x) = 0 (2.16)
In the limit of very many frequency components the Fourier sum goes over into a Fourier integral. To illustrate this general case, let us introduce the Fourier transform of E(t, x) F [E(t, x)] Ew (x) =
def
1 2
dt E(t, x) eit
(2.17)
and the corresponding inverse Fourier transform F 1 [E (x)] E(t, x) =

def
d E (x) eit
(2.18)
Then we nd that the Fourier transform of E(t, x)/t becomes F E(t, x) t

def
1 E(t, x) it dt e 2 t 1 1 E(t, x) eit i = 2 2

=0
dt E(t, x) eit
(2.19)
= i E (x) and that, consequently, F 2 E(t, x) t2

def
1 2
dt
2 E(t, x) t2
eit = 2 E (x)
(2.20)
30
The wave equations
Fourier transforming equation (2.7) on page 28 and using (2.19) and (2.20), we obtain 2 E + 2 c2 1+ i E = 0 (2.21)
A subsequent inverse Fourier transformation of the solution E of this equation leads to the same result as is obtained from the solution of equation (2.16) on page 30. I.e., by considering just one Fourier component we obtain the results which are identical to those that we would have obtained by employing the heavy machinery of Fourier transforms and Fourier integrals. Hence, under the assumption of linearity (superposition principle) there is no need for the heavy, timeconsuming forward and inverse Fourier transform machinery. In the limit of long , (2.16) tends to 2 E + 2 E=0 c2 (2.22)
which is a time-independent wave equation for E, representing undamped propagating waves. In the short limit we have instead 2 E + i0 E = 0 (2.23)
which is a time-independent diusion equation for E. For most metals 1014 s, which means that the diusion picture is good for all frequencies lower than optical frequencies. Hence, in metallic conductors, the propagation term 2 E/c2 t2 is negligible even for VHF, UHF, and SHF signals. Alternatively, we may say that the displacement current 0 E/t is negligible relative to the conduction current j = E. If we introduce the vacuum wave number k= c (2.24)
we can write, using the fact that c = 1/ 0 0 according to equation (1.11) on page 6, 1 1 = = = 0 0 ck k 0 = R0 0 k (2.25)
where in the last step we introduced the characteristic impedance for vacuum R0 = 0 376.7 0 (2.26)
31
2.2 Plane waves

Consider now the case where all elds depend only on the distance to a given plane with unit normal n . Then the del operator becomes =n =n (2.27) and Maxwells equations attain the form E n =0 (2.28a) E B n = (2.28b) t B n =0 (2.28c) B E E n = 0 j(t, x) + 0 0 = 0 E + 0 0 (2.28d) t t Scalar multiplying (2.28d) by n , we nd that 0=n n B =n 0 + 0 0 t E (2.29)
which simplies to the rst-order ordinary dierential equation for the normal component En of the electric eld dEn (2.30) + En = 0 dt 0 with the solution En = En0 et/0 = En0 et/ (2.31) This, together with (2.28a), shows that the longitudinal component of E, i.e., the component which is perpendicular to the plane surface is independent of and has a time dependence which exhibits an exponential decay, with a decrement given by the relaxation time in the medium. Scalar multiplying (2.28b) by n , we similarly nd that 0=n or B =0 (2.33) t From this, and (2.28c), we conclude that the only longitudinal component of B must be constant in both time and space. In other words, the only non-static solution must consist of transverse components. n n E = n B t (2.32)
32
Plane waves
2.2.1 Telegraphers equation

In analogy with equation (2.7) on page 28, we can easily derive the equation 2 E E 1 2 E 2 2 =0 (2.34) 0 2 t c t This equation, which describes the propagation of plane waves in a conducting medium, is called the telegraphers equation. If the medium is an insulator so that = 0, then the equation takes the form of the one-dimensional wave equation 2 E 1 2 E =0 (2.35) 2 c2 t2 As is well known, each component of this equation has a solution which can be written Ei = f ( ct) + g( + ct), i = 1, 2, 3 (2.36) where f and g are arbitrary (non-pathological) functions of their respective arguments. This general solution represents perturbations which propagate along , where the f perturbation propagates in the positive direction and the g perturbation propagates in the negative direction. If we assume that our electromagnetic elds E and B are time-harmonic, i.e., that they can each be represented by a Fourier component proportional to exp{it}, the solution of equation (2.35) above becomes E = E0 ei(tk ) = E0 ei(k t) By introducing the wave vector k = kn = n = k c c this solution can be written as E = E0 ei(kxt) (2.37) (2.38) (2.39)
Let us consider the lower sign in front of k in the exponent in (2.37). This corresponds to a wave which propagates in the direction of increasing . Inserting this solution into equation (2.28b) on page 32, gives E = iB = ik n E (2.40) n or, solving for B, k 1 1 B= n E= kE= k E = 0 0 n E (2.41) c Hence, to each transverse component of E, there exists an associated magnetic eld given by equation (2.41) above. If E and/or B has a direction in space which is constant in time, we have a plane wave.
33
2.2.2 Waves in conductive media

Assuming that our medium has a nite conductivity , and making the timeharmonic wave Ansatz in equation (2.34) on page 33, we nd that the timeindependent telegraphers equation can be written 2 E 2 E 2 + E + i E = + K2E = 0 0 0 0 2 2 where K 2 = 0 0 2 1 + i 0 = 2 c2 1+i 0 = k2 1 + i 0 (2.43) (2.42)
where, in the last step, equation (2.24) on page 31 was used to introduce the wave number k. Taking the square root of this expression, we obtain K=k 1+i = + i 0 (2.44)
Squaring, one nds that k2 1 + i or 2 = 2 k2 = k 20

2
= (2 2 ) + 2i
(2.45)
(2.46) (2.47)
Squaring the latter and combining with the former, one obtains the second order algebraic equation (in 2 ) 2 (2 k2 ) = k 4 2 2 42 0 (2.48)
which can be easily solved and one nds that 1+

0 2
=k
+1
2 1+
0 2
(2.49a)
1 (2.49b)
=k
34
Observables and averages
As a consequence, the solution of the time-independent telegraphers equation, equation (2.42) on page 34, can be written E = E0 e ei( t) (2.50)
With the aid of equation (2.41) on page 33 we can calculate the associated magnetic eld, and nd that it is given by B= 1 1 1 K k E = (k E)( + i) = ( k E) |A| ei (2.51)
where we have, in the last step, rewritten + i in the amplitude-phase form |A| exp{i}. From the above, we immediately see that E, and consequently also B, is damped, and that E and B in the wave are out of phase. In the limit 0 , we can approximate K as follows: K =k 1+i 0
1 2
0 =k i 1i 0 = (1 + i) 20
1 2
k(1 + i)
20
= 0 0 (1 + i)
0 2
(2.52)
In this limit we nd that when the wave impinges perpendicularly upon the medium, the elds are given, inside the medium, by E = E0 exp B = (1 + i) 0 exp i 2 0 t 2 (2.53a) (2.53b)
0 (n E ) 2
Hence, both elds fall o by a factor 1/e at a distance = 2 0 (2.54)
This distance is called the skin depth.
2.3 Observables and averages

In the above we have used complex notation quite extensively. This is for mathematical convenience only. For instance, in this notation dierentiations are almost trivial to perform. However, every physical measurable quantity is always real
35
valued. I.e., Ephysical = Re {Emathematical }. It is particularly important to remember this when one works with products of physical quantities. For instance, if we have two physical vectors F and G which both are time-harmonic, i.e., can be represented by Fourier components proportional to exp{it}, then we must make the following interpretation F(t, x) G(t, x) = Re {F} Re {G} = Re F0 (x) eit Re G0 (x) eit (2.55) Furthermore, letting denote complex conjugate, we can express the real part of the complex vector F as 1 it [F0 (x) eit + F (2.56) 0 (x) e ] 2 and similarly for G. Hence, the physically acceptable interpretation of the scalar product of two complex vectors, representing physical observables, is Re {F} = Re F0 (x) eit = F(t, x) G(t, x) = Re F0 (x) eit Re G0 (x) eit 1 1 it it it + G = [F0 (x) eit + F 0 (x) e ] [G0 (x) e 0 (x) e ] 2 2 1 2it 2it + F = F0 G 0 + F0 G0 + F0 G0 e 0 G0 e 4 1 2it = Re F0 G 0 + F0 G0 e 2 1 it = Re F0 eit G + F0 G0 e2it 0e 2 1 = Re F(t, x) G (t, x) + F0 G0 e2it 2 (2.57) Often in physics, we measure temporal averages ( ) of our physical observables. If so, we see that the average of the product of the two physical quantities represented by F and G can be expressed as 1 1 1 Re {F G } = F G = F G (2.58) 2 2 2 since the temporal average of the oscillating function exp{2it} vanishes. F G Re {F} Re {G} =
2.4 Bibliography
[1]
J. A HARONI, The Special Theory of Relativity, second, revised ed., Dover Publications, Inc., New York, 1985, ISBN 0-486-64870-2.
36
Bibliography
[2]
H. A LFVN
AND
(1950), p. 616. [3]

G. B. A RFKEN AND H. J. W EBER, Mathematical Methods for Physicists, fourth, international ed., Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, CA . . . , 1995, ISBN 0-12-059816-7. T. W. BARRETT AND D. M. G RIMES, Advanced Electromagnetism. Foundations, Theory and Applications, World Scientic Publishing Co., Singapore, 1995, ISBN 981-02-20952. A. O. BARUT, Electrodynamics and Classical Theory of Fields and Particles, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1980, ISBN 0-486-64038-8. R. B ECKER, Electromagnetic Fields and Interactions, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1982, ISBN 0-486-64290-9. D. B OHM, The Special Theory of Relativity, Routledge, New York, NY, 1996, ISBN 0415-14809-X. M. B ORN AND E. W OLF, Principles of Optics. Electromagnetic Theory of Propagation, Interference and Diraction of Light, sixth ed., Pergamon Press, Oxford,. . . , 1980, ISBN 0-08-026481-6. W. E. B RITTIN , W. R. S MYTHE , AND W. W YSS, Poincar gauge in electrodynamics, American Journal of Physics, 50 (1982), pp. 693696.
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10] R. A. D EAN, Elements of Abstract Algebra, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1967, ISBN 0-471-20452-8. [11] A. A. E VETT, Permutation symbol approach to elementary vector analysis, American Journal of Physics, 34 (1965), pp. 503507. [12] L. D. FADEEV AND A. A. S LAVNOV, Gauge Fields: Introduction to Quantum Theory, No. 50 in Frontiers in Physics: A Lecture Note and Reprint Series. Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1980, ISBN 0-8053-9016-2. [13] V. L. G INZBURG, Applications of Electrodynamics in Theoretical Physics and Astrophysics, Revised third ed., Gordon and Breach Science Publishers, New York, London, Paris, Montreux, Tokyo and Melbourne, 1989, ISBN 2-88124-719-9. [14] H. G OLDSTEIN, Classical Mechanics, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1981, ISBN 0-201-02918-9. [15] W. T. G RANDY, Introduction to Electrodynamics and Radiation, Academic Press, New York and London, 1970, ISBN 0-12-295250-2. [16] W. G REINER, Classical Electrodynamics, Springer-Verlag, New York, Berlin, Heidelberg, 1996, ISBN 0-387-94799-X. [17] M. G UIDRY, Gauge Field Theories: An Introduction with Applications, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1991, ISBN 0-471-63117-5.
37
[18] E. H ALLN, Electromagnetic Theory, Chapman & Hall, Ltd., London, 1962. [19] F. H OYLE , S IR AND J. V. NARLIKAR, Lectures on Cosmology and Action at a Distance Electrodynamics, World Scientic Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd, Singapore, New Jersey, London and Hong Kong, 1996, ISBN 9810-02-2573-3(pbk). [20] J. D. JACKSON, Classical Electrodynamics, third ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1999, ISBN 0-471-30932-X. [21] L. D. L ANDAU AND E. M. L IFSHITZ, The Classical Theory of Fields, fourth revised English ed., vol. 2 of Course of Theoretical Physics, Pergamon Press, Ltd., Oxford . . . , 1975, ISBN 0-08-025072-6. [22] L. L ORENZ, Philosophical Magazine (1867), pp. 287301. [23] F. E. L OW, Classical Field Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1997, ISBN 0-471-59551-9. [24] J. B. M ARION AND M. A. H EALD, Classical Electromagnetic Radiation, second ed., Academic Press, Inc. (London) Ltd., Orlando, . . . , 1980, ISBN 0-12-472257-1. [25] J. C. M AXWELL, A dynamical theory of the electromagnetic eld, Royal Society Transactions, 155 (1864). [26] J. C. M AXWELL, A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, third ed., vol. 1, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1954, ISBN 0-486-60636-8. [27] J. C. M AXWELL, A Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, third ed., vol. 2, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1954, ISBN 0-486-60637-8. [28] D. B. M ELROSE AND R. C. M C P HEDRAN, Electromagnetic Processes in Dispersive Media, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge . . . , 1991, ISBN 0-521-41025-8. [29] P. M. M ORSE AND H. F ESHBACH, Methods of Theoretical Physics, Part I. McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1953, ISBN 07-043316-8. [30] H. M UIRHEAD, The Special Theory of Relativity, The Macmillan Press Ltd., London, Beccles and Colchester, 1973, ISBN 333-12845-1. [31] C. M LLER, The Theory of Relativity, second ed., Oxford University Press, Glasgow . . . , 1972. [32] W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026. [33] F. ROHRLICH, Classical Charged Particles, Perseus Books Publishing, L.L.C., Reading, MA . . . , 1990, ISBN 0-201-48300-9. [34] J. J. S AKURAI, Advanced Quantum Mechanics, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1967, ISBN 0-201-06710-2. [35] J. S CHWINGER, A magnetic model of matter, Science, 165 (1969), pp. 757761.
38
Bibliography
[36] J. S CHWINGER , L. L. D E R AAD , J R ., K. A. M ILTON , AND W. T SAI, Classical Electrodynamics, Perseus Books, Reading, MA, 1998, ISBN 0-7382-0056-5. [37] D. E. S OPER, Classical Field Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, London, Sydney and Toronto, 1976, ISBN 0-471-81368-0. [38] B. S PAIN, Tensor Calculus, third ed., Oliver and Boyd, Ltd., Edinburgh and London, 1965, ISBN 05-001331-9. [39] J. A. S TRATTON, Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY and London, 1953, ISBN 07-062150-0. [40] W. E. T HIRRING, Classical Mathematical Physics, Springer-Verlag, New York, Vienna, 1997, ISBN 0-387-94843-0. [41] J. VANDERLINDE, Classical Electromagnetic Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, Chichester, Brisbane, Toronto, and Singapore, 1993, ISBN 0-471-57269-1. [42] J. A. W HEELER AND R. P. F EYNMAN, Interaction with the absorber as a mechanism for radiation, Reviews of Modern Physics, 17 (1945), pp. 157. [43] A. N. W HITEHEAD, Concept of Nature, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge . . . , 1920, ISBN 0-521-09245-0.
39
2.5 Example
E XAMPLE 2.1 WAVE EQUATIONS IN ELECTROMAGNETODYNAMICS
Derive the wave equation for the E eld described by the electromagnetodynamic equations (Diracs symmetrised Maxwell equations) [cf. equations (1.50) on page 16] e 0 B E= 0 jm t B = 0 m E= B = 0 0 E + 0 je t (2.59a) (2.59b) (2.59c) (2.59d)
under the assumption of vanishing net electric and magnetic charge densities and in the absence of electromotive and magnetomotive forces. Interpret this equation physically. Taking the curl of (2.59b) and using (2.59d), and assuming, for symmetry reasons, that there exists a linear relation between the magnetic current density jm and the magnetic eld B (the magnetic dual of Ohms law for electric currents, je = e E) jm = m B one nds, noting that 0 0 = 1/c , that
2
(2.60) ( B) = 0 m B t t 1 E c 2 t 0 e E 1 2 E 2 2 t c t 1 E c 2 t
( E) = 0 jm
0 je +
(2.61)
= 0 m 0 e E +
Using the vector operator identity ( E) = ( E) 2 E, and the fact that E = 0 for a vanishing net electric charge, we can rewrite the wave equation as 2 E 0 e + m c2 E 1 2 E m e 2 2 2 0 E = 0 t c t (2.62)
This is the homogeneous electromagnetodynamic wave equation for E we were after. Compared to the ordinary electrodynamic wave equation for E, equation (2.7) on page 28, we see that we pick up extra terms. In order to understand what these extra terms mean physically, we analyse the time-independent wave equation for a single Fourier component. Then our wave equation becomes 2 E + i0 e + = 2 E + 2 c2 m c2 1 E+ 2 m e E 2 0 E c2 +i e + m /c2 E=0 0
1 0 m e 2 0
(2.63)
Realising that, according to formula (2.26) on page 31, 0 /0 is the square of the vacuum radiation resistance R0 , and rearranging a bit, we obtain the time-independent wave equation in
40
Example
Diracs symmetrised electrodynamics R2 2 e + m /c2 0 m e 2 E = 0 E+ 2 1 2 1+i R2 m e c 0 1 0 2
(2.64)
From this equation we conclude that the existence of magnetic charges (magnetic monopoles), and non-vanishing electric and magnetic conductivities would lead to a shift in the eective wave number of the wave. Furthermore, even if the electric conductivity e vanishes, the imaginary term does not necessarily vanish and the wave might therefore experience damping (or growth) according as m is positive (or negative). This would happen in a hypothetical medium which is a perfect insulator for electric currents but which can carry magnetic currents. Finally, we note that in the particular case that = R0 m e , the wave equation becomes a (time-independent) diusion equation 2 E + i0 e + m c2 E=0 (2.65)
and, hence, no waves exist at all!

E ND OF EXAMPLE 2.1
41
3
Electromagnetic Potentials
As an alternative to expressing the laws of electrodynamics in terms of electric and magnetic elds, it turns out that it is often more convenient to express the theory in terms of potentials. This is particularly true for problems related to radiation. In this chapter we will introduce and study the properties of such potentials and shall nd that they exhibit some remarkable properties which elucidate the fundamental aspects of electromagnetism and lead naturally to the special theory of relativity.
3.1 The electrostatic scalar potential

As we saw in equation (1.8) on page 6, the electrostatic eld Estat (x) is irrotational. Hence, it may be expressed in terms of the gradient of a scalar eld. If we denote this scalar eld by stat (x), we get Estat (x) = stat (x) (3.1)
Taking the divergence of this and using equation (1.7) on page 5, we obtain Poissons equation 2 stat (x) = Estat (x) = (x) 0 (3.2)
A comparison with the denition of Estat , namely equation (1.5) on page 4, shows that this equation has the solution stat (x) = 1 40 d3x
V
(x ) + |x x |
(3.3)
43
3. Electromagnetic Potentials
where the integration is taken over all source points x at which the charge density (x ) is non-zero and is an arbitrary quantity which has a vanishing gradient. An example of such a quantity is a scalar constant. The scalar function stat (x) in equation (3.3) on page 43 is called the electrostatic scalar potential.
3.2 The magnetostatic vector potential

Consider the equations of magnetostatics (1.22) on page 9. From equation (F.63) on page 181 we know that any 3D vector a has the property that ( a) 0 and in the derivation of equation (1.17) on page 8 in magnetostatics we found that Bstat (x) = 0. We therefore realise that we can always write Bstat (x) = Astat (x) (3.4)
where Astat (x) is called the magnetostatic vector potential. We saw above that the electrostatic potential (as any scalar potential) is not unique: we may, without changing the physics, add to it a quantity whose spatial gradient vanishes. A similar arbitrariness is true also for the magnetostatic vector potential. In the magnetostatic case, we may start from Biot-Savarts law as expressed by equation (1.15) on page 8. Identifying this expression with equation (3.4) allows us to dene the static vector potential as Astat (x) = 0 4 d3x
V
j(x ) + a(x) |x x |
(3.5)
where a(x) is an arbitrary vector eld whose curl vanishes. From equation (F.62) on page 181 we know that such a vector can always be written as the gradient of a scalar eld.
3.3 The electrodynamic potentials

Let us now generalise the static analysis above to the electrodynamic case, i.e., the case with temporal and spatial dependent sources (t, x) and j(t, x), and corresponding elds E(t, x) and B(t, x), as described by Maxwells equations (1.45) on page 15. In other words, let us study the electrodynamic potentials (t, x) and A(t, x).
44
Gauge transformations
From equation (1.45c) on page 15 we note that also in electrodynamics the homogeneous equation B(t, x) = 0 remains valid. Because of this divergencefree nature of the time- and space-dependent magnetic eld, we can express it as the curl of an electromagnetic vector potential: B(t, x) = A(t, x) (3.6)
Inserting this expression into the other homogeneous Maxwell equation (1.32) on page 13, we obtain [ A(t, x)] = A(t, x) t t or, rearranging the terms, E(t, x) = E(t, x) + A(t, x) t =0 (3.7)
(3.8)
As before we utilise the vanishing curl of a vector expression to write this vector expression as the gradient of a scalar function. If, in analogy with the electrostatic case, we introduce the electromagnetic scalar potential function (t, x), equation (3.8) becomes equivalent to A(t, x) = (t, x) (3.9) t This means that in electrodynamics, E(t, x) is calculated from the potentials according to the formula E(t, x) + A(t, x) (3.10) t and B(t, x) from formula (3.6) above. Hence, it is a matter of taste whether we want to express the laws of electrodynamics in terms of the potentials (t, x) and A(t, x), or in terms of the elds E(t, x) and B(t, x). However, there exists an important dierence between the two approaches: in classical electrodynamics the only directly observable quantities are the elds themselves (and quantities derived from them) and not the potentials. On the other hand, the treatment becomes signicantly simpler if we use the potentials in our calculations and then, at the nal stage, use equation (3.6) and equation (3.10) above to calculate the elds or physical quantities expressed in the elds. E(t, x) = (t, x)
3.4 Gauge transformations

We saw in section 3.1 on page 43 and in section 3.2 on page 44 that in electrostatics and magnetostatics we have a certain mathematical degree of freedom, up to
45
terms of vanishing gradients and curls, to pick suitable forms for the potentials and still get the same physical result. In fact, the way the electromagnetic scalar potential (t, x) and the vector potential A(t, x) are related to the physically observables gives leeway for similar manipulation of them also in electrodynamics. If we transform (t, x) and A(t, x) simultaneously into new ones (t, x) and A (t, x) according to the mapping scheme (t, x) t A(t, x) A (t, x) = A(t, x) (t, x) (t, x) (t, x) = (t, x) + (3.11a) (3.11b)
where (t, x) is an arbitrary, dierentiable scalar function called the gauge function, and insert the transformed potentials into equation (3.10) on page 45 for the electric eld and into equation (3.6) on page 45 for the magnetic eld, we obtain the transformed elds E = () A () A A = + = t t t t t B = A = A () = A (3.12a) (3.12b)
where, once again equation (F.62) on page 181 was used. We see that the elds are unaected by the gauge transformation (3.11). A transformation of the potentials and A which leaves the elds, and hence Maxwells equations, invariant is called a gauge transformation. A physical law which does not change under a gauge transformation is said to be gauge invariant. It is only those quantities (expressions) that are gauge invariant that have experimental signicance. Of course, the EM elds themselves are gauge invariant.
3.5 Gauge conditions

Inserting (3.10) and (3.6) on page 45 into Maxwells equations (1.45) on page 15 we obtain, after some simple algebra and the use of equation (1.11) on page 6, the general inhomogeneous wave equations (t, x) ( A) 0 t 2 1A 1 2 A 2 2 ( A) = 0 j(t, x) + 2 c t c t
2 =
(3.13a) (3.13b)
46
Gauge conditions
which can be rewritten in the following, more symmetric, form (t, x) 1 1 2 2 = + A+ 2 c2 t2 0 t c t 1 1 2 A 2 A = 0 j(t, x) A + 2 2 2 c t c t (3.14a) (3.14b)
These two second order, coupled, partial dierential equations, representing in all four scalar equations (one for and one each for the three components Ai , i = 1, 2, 3 of A) are completely equivalent to the formulation of electrodynamics in terms of Maxwells equations, which represent eight scalar rst-order, coupled, partial dierential equations. As they stand, equations (3.13) on page 46 and equations (3.14) look complicated and may seem to be of limited use. However, if we write equation (3.6) on page 45 in the form A(t, x) = B(t, x) we can consider this as a specication of A. But we know from Helmholtz theorem that in order to determine the (spatial) behaviour of A completely, we must also specify A. Since this divergence does not enter the derivation above, we are free to choose A in whatever way we like and still obtain the same physical results!
3.5.1 Lorenz-Lorentz gauge

If we choose A to full the so called Lorenz-Lorentz gauge condition1 1 =0 (3.15) c2 t the coupled inhomogeneous wave equation (3.14) on page 47 simplify into the following set of uncoupled inhomogeneous wave equations: A+
2
def
def
1 2 1 2 (t, x) 2 = 2 = c2 t2 c2 t2 0 2 2 1 1A 2 A = 2 2 2 A = 0 j(t, x) 2 2 c t c t
(3.16a) (3.16b)
where 2 is the dAlembert operator discussed in example M.5 on page 199. Each of these four scalar equations is an inhomogeneous wave equation of the following generic form:
2
(t, x) = f (t, x)
(3.17)
1 In fact, the Dutch physicist Hendrik Antoon Lorentz, who in 1903 demonstrated the covariance of Maxwells equations, was not the original discoverer of this condition. It had been discovered by the Danish physicist Ludvig V. Lorenz already in 1867 [22]. In the literature, this fact has sometimes been overlooked and the condition was earlier referred to as the Lorentz gauge condition.
47
where is a shorthand for either or one of the components Ai of the vector potential A, and f is the pertinent generic source component, (t, x)/0 or 0 ji (t, x), respectively. We assume that our sources are well-behaved enough in time t so that the Fourier transform pair for the generic source function f F 1 [ f (x)] f (t, x) = F [ f (t, x)] f (x) =
def def
d f (x) eit dt f (t, x) eit
1 2
(3.18a) (3.18b)
exists, and that the same is true for the generic potential component : (t, x) = (x) =

d (x) eit

(3.19a) (3.19b)
1 2
dt (t, x) eit
Inserting the Fourier representations (3.18a) and (3.19a) into equation (3.17) on page 47, and using the vacuum dispersion relation for electromagnetic waves = ck (3.20)
the generic 3D inhomogeneous wave equation, equation (3.17) on page 47, turns into 2 (x) + k2 (x) = f (x) (3.21)
which is a 3D inhomogeneous time-independent wave equation, often called the 3D inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation. As postulated by Huygens principle, each point on a wave front acts as a point source for spherical wavelets of varying amplitude. A new wave front is formed by a linear superposition of the individual wavelets from each of the point sources on the old wave front. The solution of (3.21) can therefore be expressed as a weighted superposition of solutions of an equation where the source term has been replaced by a single point source 2G(x, x ) + k2G(x, x ) = (x x ) (3.22)
and the solution of equation (3.21) above which corresponds to the frequency is given by the superposition (x) = d3x f (x )G(x, x )
V
(3.23)
48
Gauge conditions
where f (x ) is the wavelet amplitude at the source point x . The function G(x, x ) is called the Green function or the propagator. Due to translational invariance in space, G(x, x ) = G(x x ). Furthermore, in equation (3.22) on page 48, the Dirac generalised function (x x ), which represents the point source, depends only on x x and there is no angular dependence in the equation. Hence, the solution can only be dependent on r = |x x | and not on the direction of x x . If we interpret r as the radial coordinate in a spherically polar coordinate system, and recall the expression for the Laplace operator in such a coordinate system, equation (3.22) on page 48 becomes d2 (rG) + k2 (rG) = r(r) dr2 (3.24)
Away from r = |x x | = 0, i.e., away from the source point x , this equation takes the form d2 (rG) + k2 (rG) = 0 dr2 with the well-known general solution G = C+ eikr eik|xx | eikr eik|xx | + C C+ + C r r |x x | |x x | (3.26) (3.25)
where C are constants. In order to evaluate the constants C , we insert the general solution, equation (3.26), into equation (3.22) on page 48 and integrate over a small volume around r = |x x | = 0. Since G( x x ) C + 1 1 + C , |x x | |x x | xx 0 (3.27)
The volume integrated equation (3.22) on page 48 can under this assumption be approximated by C+ + C d3x 2
V
1 |x x |
+ k2 C + + C
d3x
V
1 |x x |
(3.28)
d x ( x x )
3 V
In virtue of the fact that the volume element d3x in spherical polar coordinates is proportional to |x x |2 , the second integral vanishes when |x x | 0. Furthermore, from equation (F.73) on page 181, we nd that the integrand in the rst integral can be written as 4(|x x |) and, hence, that C+ + C = 1 4 (3.29)
49
Insertion of the general solution equation (3.26) on page 49 into equation (3.23) on page 48 gives eik|xx | eik|xx | + C d3x f (x ) (3.30) |x x | |x x | V V The inverse Fourier transform of this back to the t domain is obtained by inserting the above expression for (x) into equation (3.19a) on page 48: (x) = C + d3x f (x ) (t, x) = C + d3x
V
d f (x )
exp i t |x x |
k|xx |
|x x | If we introduce the retarded time tret and the advanced time tadv in the following way [using the fact that in vacuum k/ = 1/c, according to equation (3.20) on page 48]:
V
+ C
d3x
d f (x )
exp i t +
k|xx |
(3.31)
k |x x | |x x | =t c k |x x | |x x | =t+ tadv = tadv (t, x x ) = t + c and use equation (3.18a) on page 48, we obtain tret = tret (t, x x ) = t (t, x) = C + d3x
(3.32a) (3.32b)
f (tadv , x ) f (tret , x ) + C d3x (3.33) |x x | |x x | V V This is a solution to the generic inhomogeneous wave equation for the potential components equation (3.17) on page 47. We note that the solution at time t at the eld point x is dependent on the behaviour at other times t of the source at x and that both retarded and advanced t are mathematically acceptable solutions. However, if we assume that causality requires that the potential at (t, x) is set up by the source at an earlier time, i.e., at (tret , x ), we must in equation (3.33) above set C = 0 and therefore, according to equation (3.29) on page 49, C + = 1/(4).2 From the above discussion on the solution of the inhomogeneous wave equations in the Lorenz-Lorentz gauge we conclude that, under the assumption of causality, the electrodynamic potentials in vacuum can be written 1 (tret , x ) d3x 40 V |x x | 0 j ( t ret , x ) A(t, x) = d3x 4 V |x x | (t, x) = (3.34a) (3.34b)
2 In fact, inspired by a discussion by Paul A. M. Dirac, John A. Wheeler and Richard P. Feynman derived in 1945 a fully self-consistent electrodynamics using both the retarded and the advanced potentials [42]; see also [19].
50
Gauge conditions
Since these retarded potentials were obtained as solutions to the Lorenz-Lorentz equations (3.16) on page 47 they are valid in the Lorenz-Lorentz gauge but may be gauge transformed according to the scheme described in subsection 3.4 on page 45. As they stand, we shall use them frequently in the following. The potentials (t, x) and A(t, x) calculated from (3.13a) on page 46, with an arbitrary choice of A, can be further gauge transformed according to (3.11) on page 46. If, in particular, we choose A according to the Lorenz-Lorentz condition, equation (3.15) on page 47, and apply the gauge transformation (3.11) on the resulting Lorenz-Lorentz potential equations (3.16) on page 47, these equations will be transformed into 1 2 1 2 (t, x) 2 + 2 = 2 2 2 2 c t t c t 0 2 2 1A 1 2 A 2 2 2 = 0 j(t, x) c2 t2 c t (3.35a) (3.35b)
We notice that if we require that the gauge function (t, x) itself be restricted to full the wave equation 1 2 2 = 0 (3.36) c2 t2 these transformed Lorenz-Lorentz equations will keep their original form. The set of potentials which have been gauge transformed according to equation (3.11) on page 46 with a gauge function (t, x) restricted to full equation (3.36), or, in other words, those gauge transformed potentials for which the Lorenz-Lorentz equations (3.16) are invariant, comprise the Lorenz-Lorentz gauge.
3.5.2 Coulomb gauge

In Coulomb gauge, often employed in quantum electrodynamics, one chooses A = 0 so that equations (3.13) on page 46 or equations (3.14) on page 47 become (t, x) (3.37a) 0 1 2 A 1 2 A 2 2 = 0 j(t, x) + 2 (3.37b) c t c t The rst of these two is the time-dependent Poissons equation which, in analogy with equation (3.3) on page 43, has the solution 2 = (t, x) = 1 40 d3x
V
(t, x ) + |x x |
(3.38)
51
where has vanishing gradient. We note that in the scalar potential expression the charge density source is evaluated at time t. The retardation (and advancement) eects therefore occur only in the vector potential, which is the solution of the inhomogeneous wave equation equation (3.37b) on page 51 for the vector potential A. In order to solve this equation, one splits up j in a longitudinal ( ) and transverse () part, j j + j where j = 0 and j = 0, and note that the equation of continuity equation (1.23) on page 10 becomes 0 2 + j +j = t t = 0 t +j =0 (3.39) Furthermore, since = 0 and j = 0, one nds that 0 t +j =0 (3.40)
Integrating these two equations, letting f be an arbitrary, well-behaved vector eld and g an arbitrary, well-behaved scalar eld, one obtains 1 = 0 j + f c2 t 1 = 0 j + g c2 t From the fact that f = g, it is clear that ( f ) = g = 0 ( f ) = g = 0 (3.42a) (3.42b) (3.41a) (3.41b)
which, according to Helmholtz theorem, means that f = g = 0. The inhomogeneous wave equation equation (3.37b) on page 51 thus becomes 2 A 1 2 A 1 = 0 j + 2 = 0 j + 0 j = 0 j 2 2 c t c t (3.43)
which shows that in Coulomb gauge the source of the vector potential A is the transverse part of the current j . The longitudinal part of the current j does not contribute to the vector potential. The retarded solution is (cf. equation (3.34a) on page 50): A(t, x) = 0 4 d3x
V
j (tret , x ) |x x |
(3.44)
The Coulomb gauge condition is therefore also called the transverse gauge.
52
Bibliography
3.5.3 Velocity gauge

If A fulls the velocity gauge condition, sometimes referred to as the complete -Lorenz gauge, A+ 1 = 0, c2 t = c2 v2 (3.45)
we obtain the Lorenz-Lorentz gauge condition for = 1 and the Coulomb gauge condition for = 0, respectively. Hence, the velocity gauge is a generalisation of both these gauges. Inserting equation (3.45) into the coupled inhomogeneous wave equation (3.14) on page 47 they become 2 1 2 (t, x) = v2 t2 0 2 1A 1 2 A 2 2 = 0 j(t, x) + 2 c t c t (3.46a) (3.46b)
or, in a more symmetric form, (t, x) 1 1 2 = 2 c2 t2 0 c t t 2 1 1A 2 A 2 2 = 0 j(t, x) + 2 c t c t 2 Other useful gauges are The Poincar gauge (or radial gauge) where [9] (t, x) = x A(t, x) =
1 0 1 0
(3.47a) (3.47b)
d E(t, x)
(3.48a) (3.48b)
d B(t, x) x
The temporal gauge, also known as the Hamilton gauge, dened by = 0. The axial gauge, dened by A3 = 0. The process of choosing a particular gauge condition is known as gauge xing.
3.6 Bibliography
[1] W. E. B RITTIN , W. R. S MYTHE , AND W. W YSS, Poincar gauge in electrodynamics, American Journal of Physics, 50 (1982), pp. 693696.
53
[2] L. D. FADEEV AND A. A. S LAVNOV, Gauge Fields: Introduction to Quantum Theory, No. 50 in Frontiers in Physics: A Lecture Note and Reprint Series. Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1980, ISBN 0-8053-9016-2. [3] M. G UIDRY, Gauge Field Theories: An Introduction with Applications, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1991, ISBN 0-471-63117-5. [4] F. H OYLE , S IR AND J. V. NARLIKAR, Lectures on Cosmology and Action at a Distance Electrodynamics, World Scientic Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd, Singapore, New Jersey, London and Hong Kong, 1996, ISBN 9810-02-2573-3(pbk). [5] J. D. JACKSON, Classical Electrodynamics, third ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1999, ISBN 0-471-30932-X. [6] L. L ORENZ, Philosophical Magazine (1867), pp. 287301. [7] W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026. [8] J. A. W HEELER AND R. P. F EYNMAN, Interaction with the absorber as a mechanism for radiation, Reviews of Modern Physics, 17 (1945), pp. 157.
54
Examples
3.7 Examples
E LECTROMAGNETODYNAMIC POTENTIALS E XAMPLE 3.1
In Diracs symmetrised form of electrodynamics (electromagnetodynamics), Maxwells equations are replaced by [see also equations (1.50) on page 16]: E= e 0 B t (3.49a) (3.49b) (3.49c) (3.49d)
E = 0 jm B = 0 m
E B = 0 je + 0 0 t
In this theory, one derives the inhomogeneous wave equations for the usual electric scalar and vector potentials (e , Ae ) and their magnetic counterparts (m , Am ) by assuming that the potentials are related to the elds in the following symmetrised form: e A (t, x) Am t 1 1 B = 2 m (t, x) 2 Am (t, x) + Ae c c t E = e (t, x) (3.50a) (3.50b)
In the absence of magnetic charges, or, equivalently for m 0 and Am 0, these formulae reduce to the usual Maxwell theory formula (3.10) on page 45 and formula (3.6) on page 45, respectively, as they should. Inserting the symmetrised expressions (3.50) above into equations (3.49), one obtains [cf., equations (3.13a) on page 46] e (t, x) ( Ae ) = t 0 m (t, x) m 2 m + ( A ) = t 0 1 2 Ae 1 e 2 e A + Ae + 2 2 2 c t c t 2 e + 1 2 Am 1 m 2 m m A + A + c2 t2 c 2 t (3.51a) (3.51b) = 0 je (t, x) = 0 jm (t, x) (3.51c) (3.51d)
By choosing the conditions on the divergence of the vector potentials according to the LorenzLorentz condition [cf. equation (3.15) on page 47] 1 e =0 c2 t 1 Am + 2 m = 0 c t Ae + these coupled wave equations simplify to (3.52) (3.53)
55
1 2 e 2 e c2 t2 1 2 Ae 2 Ae c2 t2 1 2 m 2 m c2 t2 1 2 Am 2 Am c 2 t 2
e (t, x) 0
(3.54a) (3.54b) (3.54c) (3.54d)
= 0 je (t, x) = m (t, x) 0
= 0 jm (t, x)
exhibiting, once again, the striking properties of Diracs symmetrised Maxwell theory.
E ND OF EXAMPLE 3.1
56
4
Electromagnetic Fields and Matter
The microscopic Maxwell equations (1.45) derived in chapter 1 are valid on all scales where a classical description is good. However, when macroscopic matter is present, it is sometimes convenient to use the corresponding macroscopic Maxwell equations (in a statistical sense) in which auxiliary, derived elds are introduced in order to incorporate eects of macroscopic matter when this is immersed fully or partially in an electromagnetic eld.
4.1 Electric polarisation and displacement

In certain cases, for instance in engineering applications, it may be convenient to separate the inuence of an external electric eld on free charges on the one hand and on neutral matter in bulk on the other. This view, which, as we shall see, has certain limitations, leads to the introduction of (di)electric polarisation and magnetisation which, in turn, justies the introduction of two help quantities, the electric displacement vector D and the magnetising eld H.
4.1.1 Electric multipole moments

The electrostatic properties of a spatial volume containing electric charges and located near a point x0 can be characterized in terms of the total charge or electric
57
4. Electromagnetic Fields and Matter
monopole moment q= d3x (x )

V
(4.1)
where the is the charge density introduced in equation (1.7) on page 5, the electric dipole moment vector p(x0 ) = d3x (x x0 ) (x )
V
(4.2)
with components pi , i = 1, 2, 3, the electric quadrupole moment tensor

Q(x0 ) =
d3x (x x0 )(x x0 ) (x )
V
(4.3)
with components Qi j , i, j = 1, 2, 3, and higher order electric moments. In particular, the electrostatic potential equation (3.3) on page 43 from a charge distribution located near x0 can be Taylor expanded in the following way: stat (x) = 1 q (x x0 )i 1 pi + 2 40 |x x0 | |x x0 | |x x0 | 3 (x x0 )i (x x0 ) j 1 1 Qi j + i j 2 |x x0 | |x x0 | 2 |x x0 |3
(4.4) + ...
where Einsteins summation convention over i and j is implied. As can be seen from this expression, only the rst few terms are important if the eld point (observation point) is far away from x0 . For a normal medium, the major contributions to the electrostatic interactions come from the net charge and the lowest order electric multipole moments induced by the polarisation due to an applied electric eld. Particularly important is the dipole moment. Let P denote the electric dipole moment density (electric dipole moment per unit volume; unit: C/m2 ), also known as the electric polarisation, in some medium. In analogy with the second term in the expansion equation (4.4) above, the electric potential from this volume distribution P(x ) of electric dipole moments p at the source point x can be written p (x) = 1 40 1 = 40 1 xx = |x x |3 40 1 d3x P(x ) |x x | d3x P(x )
V
d3x P(x )
V
1 |x x |
(4.5)
58
Electric polarisation and displacement
Using the expression equation (M.97) on page 200 and applying the divergence theorem, we can rewrite this expression for the potential as follows: p (x) = 1 40 1 = 40 P(x ) P(x ) d3x |x x | |x x | V P(x ) P(x ) d3x d2x n |x x | |x x | V d3x
(4.6)
where the rst term, which describes the eects of the induced, non-cancelling dipole moment on the surface of the volume, can be neglected, unless there is a discontinuity in n P at the surface. Doing so, we nd that the contribution from the electric dipole moments to the potential is given by p = 1 40 d3x
V
P(x ) |x x |
(4.7)
Comparing this expression with expression equation (3.3) on page 43 for the electrostatic potential from a static charge distribution , we see that P(x) has the characteristics of a charge density and that, to the lowest order, the eective charge density becomes (x) P(x), in which the second term is a polarisation term. The version of equation (1.7) on page 5 where free, true charges and bound, polarisation charges are separated thus becomes E= true (x) P(x) 0 (4.8)
Rewriting this equation, and at the same time introducing the electric displacement vector (C/m2 ) D = 0 E + P we obtain (0 E + P) = D = true (x) (4.10) (4.9)
where true is the true charge density in the medium. This is one of Maxwells equations and is valid also for time varying elds. By introducing the notation pol = P for the polarised charge density in the medium, and total = true + pol for the total charge density, we can write down the following alternative version of Maxwells equation (4.22a) on page 62 E= total (x) 0 (4.11)
59
Often, for low enough eld strengths |E|, the linear and isotropic relationship between P and E P = 0 E (4.12)
is a good approximation. The quantity is the electric susceptibility which is material dependent. For electromagnetically anisotropic media such as a magnetised plasma or a birefringent crystal, the susceptibility is a tensor. In general, the relationship is not of a simple linear form as in equation (4.12) above but nonlinear terms are important. In such a situation the principle of superposition is no longer valid and non-linear eects such as frequency conversion and mixing can be expected. Inserting the approximation (4.12) into equation (4.9) on page 59, we can write the latter D = E where, approximately, = 0 (1 + ) (4.14) (4.13)
4.2 Magnetisation and the magnetising eld

An analysis of the properties of stationary magnetic media and the associated currents shows that three such types of currents exist: 1. In analogy with true charges for the electric case, we may have true currents jtrue , i.e., a physical transport of true charges. 2. In analogy with electric polarisation P there may be a form of charge transport associated with the changes of the polarisation with time. Such currents, induced by an external eld, are called polarisation currents and are identied with P/t. 3. There may also be intrinsic currents of a microscopic, often atomic, nature that are inaccessible to direct observation, but which may produce net effects at discontinuities and boundaries. These magnetisation currents are denoted jM . No magnetic monopoles have been observed yet. So there is no correspondence in the magnetic case to the electric monopole moment (4.1). The lowest
60
Magnetisation and the magnetising eld
order magnetic moment, corresponding to the electric dipole moment (4.2), is the magnetic dipole moment m= 1 2 d3x (x x0 ) j(x )
V
(4.15)
For a distribution of magnetic dipole moments in a volume, we may describe this volume in terms of the magnetisation, or magnetic dipole moment per unit volume, M. Via the denition of the vector potential one can show that the magnetisation current and the magnetisation is simply related: jM = M (4.16)
In a stationary medium we therefore have a total current which is (approximately) the sum of the three currents enumerated above: jtotal = jtrue + P +M t P +M t (4.17)
One might then, erroneously, be led to think that B = 0 jtrue + (INCORRECT)
Moving the term M to the left hand side and introducing the magnetising eld (magnetic eld intensity, Ampre-turn density) as H= B M 0 (4.18)
and using the denition for D, equation (4.9) on page 59, we can write this incorrect equation in the following form H = jtrue + P D E = jtrue + 0 t t t (4.19)
As we see, in this simplistic view, we would pick up a term which makes the equation inconsistent; the divergence of the left hand side vanishes while the divergence of the right hand side does not. Maxwell realised this and to overcome this inconsistency he was forced to add his famous displacement current term which precisely compensates for the last term in the right hand side. In chapter 1, we discussed an alternative way, based on the postulate of conservation of electric charge, to introduce the displacement current. We may, in analogy with the electric case, introduce a magnetic susceptibility for the medium. Denoting it m , we can write H= B (4.20)
61
where, approximately, = 0 (1 + m ) (4.21)
Maxwells equations expressed in terms of the derived eld quantities D and H are D = (t, x) B=0 E= B t (4.22a) (4.22b) (4.22c)
D (4.22d) t and are called Maxwells macroscopic equations. These equations are convenient to use in certain simple cases. Together with the boundary conditions and the constitutive relations, they describe uniquely (but only approximately!) the properties of the electric and magnetic elds in matter. H = j(t, x) +
4.3 Energy and momentum

We shall use Maxwells macroscopic equations in the following considerations on the energy and momentum of the electromagnetic eld and its interaction with matter.
4.3.1 The energy theorem in Maxwells theory

Scalar multiplying (4.22c) by H, (4.22d) by E and subtracting, we obtain H ( E) E ( H) = (E H) (4.23) D 1 B = H EjE = (H B + E D) j E t t 2 t Integration over the entire volume V and using Gausss theorem (the divergence theorem), we obtain t d3x
V
1 (H B + E D) = 2
d3x j E +
d2x n (E H)
S
(4.24)
We assume the validity of Ohms law so that in the presence of an electromotive force eld, we make the linear approximation equation (1.28) on page 12: j = (E + EEMF ) (4.25)
62
Energy and momentum
which means that j2
d3x j E =
d3x
V
d3x j EEMF
V
(4.26)
Inserting this into equation (4.24) on page 62, one obtains j2 + t 1 (E D + H B) 2

Field energy
d3x j EEMF =
d3x
V
d3x
V
(4.27)
Applied electric power
Joule heat
d2x n (E H)
S Radiated power
(4.28)
which is the energy theorem in Maxwells theory also known as Poyntings theorem. It is convenient to introduce the following quantities: 1 d3x E D 2 V 1 d3x H B Um = 2 V S=EH Ue =
(4.29) (4.30) (4.31)
where Ue is the electric eld energy, Um is the magnetic eld energy, both measured in J, and S is the Poynting vector (power ux), measured in W/m2 .
4.3.2 The momentum theorem in Maxwells theory

Let us now investigate the momentum balance (force actions) in the case that a eld interacts with matter in a non-relativistic way. For this purpose we consider the force density given by the Lorentz force per unit volume E + j B. Using
63
Maxwells equations (4.22) and symmetrising, we obtain E + j B = ( D)E + H D t B D B t
= E( D) + ( H) B
= E( D) B ( H) B (D B) + D t t = E( D) B ( H) (D B) D ( E) + H( B) t
=0
= [E( D) D ( E)] + [H( B) B ( H)] (D B) t
(4.32)
One veries easily that the ith vector components of the two terms in square brackets in the right hand member of (4.32) can be expressed as [E( D) D ( E)]i = 1 2 E D E D xi xi + x j 1 E i D j E D i j 2 (4.33)
and [H( B) B ( H)]i = 1 2 H B H B xi xi + x j 1 Hi B j B H i j 2 (4.34)
respectively. Using these two expressions in the ith component of equation (4.32) and reshuing terms, we get (E + j B)i = x j 1 2 E D E D xi xi + H B H B xi xi + (D B)i t
1 1 E i D j E D i j + Hi B j H B i j 2 2 (4.35)
64
Energy and momentum
Introducing the electric volume force Fev via its ith component (Fev )i = (E + j B)i 1 2 E D E D xi xi + H B H B xi xi (4.36)
and the Maxwell stress tensor T with components 1 1 T i j = E i D j E D i j + Hi B j H B i j 2 2 we nally obtain the force equation Fev + (D B) t =
i
(4.37)
T i j = ( T)i x j
(4.38)
If we introduce the relative electric permittivity e and the relative magnetic permeability m as D = e 0 E = E B = m 0 H = H we can rewrite (4.38) as T i j = x j Fev + e m S c2 t (4.41)
i
(4.39) (4.40)
where S is the Poynting vector dened in equation (4.31) on page 63. Integration over the entire volume V yields d3x Fev + d dt d3x
V
e m S= c2
d2x T n
S Maxwell stress
(4.42)
Force on the matter
Field momentum
which expresses the balance between the force on the matter, the rate of change of the electromagnetic eld momentum and the Maxwell stress. This equation is called the momentum theorem in Maxwells theory. In vacuum (4.42) becomes
V
d3x (E + v B) +
1 d c2 dt
d3x S =
d2x T n
S
(4.43)
or d mech d eld p + p = dt dt d2x T n

S
(4.44)
65
4.4 Bibliography
[1] E. H ALLN, Electromagnetic Theory, Chapman & Hall, Ltd., London, 1962. [2] J. D. JACKSON, Classical Electrodynamics, third ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1999, ISBN 0-471-30932-X. [3] W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026. [4] J. A. S TRATTON, Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY and London, 1953, ISBN 07-062150-0.
66
Example
4.5 Example
TAYLOR EXPANSION OF THE ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL E XAMPLE 4.1
The electrostatic potential is stat (x) = 1 40 d3x

V
(x ) |x x |
(4.45)
For a charge distribution source (x ), well localised in a small volume V around x0 , we Taylor expand the inverse distance 1/ |x x | with respect to x0 to obtain 1 1 = |x x | |(x x0 ) (x x0 )| = =
1 3 n |x 1 1 3 x0 | + xi xi [( xi1 x0i1 )] [( xin x0in )] |x x0 | n=1 n! i n 1 = 1 i = 1 n 1 1 n |x 1 (1)n x0 | n3 n2 n1 + n ( x x01 ) ( x2 x02 ) ( x3 x03 ) n2 n1 |x x0 | n=1 n1 +n2 +n3 =n n1 !n2 !n3 ! x1 x2 x33 1 ni 0
(4.46) Inserting this expansion into the integrand of equation (4.45), we get stat (x) =
1 40
d3x (x ) |x x0 | d3x ( x1 x01 )n1 ( x2 x02 )n2 ( x3 x03 )n3 (x ) (4.47)
1 n |x (1)n x0 | n3 n2 n1 n=1 n1 +n2 +n3 =n n1 !n2 !n3 ! x1 x2 x3 ni 0
Limiting ourselves to the rst three terms 1 (x) = 40

stat 3 3 3 |xx | |xx | q 1 0 0 pi + Qi j + ... xi 2 x x |x x0 | i=1 i j i=1 j=1 1 2 1
(4.48)
and recalling that

1 |x xi x0i x0 | = xi |x x0 |
(4.49)
and
1 2 |x 3( xi x0i )( x j x0 j ) |x x0 |2 i j x0 | = xi x j |x x0 |5
(4.50)
we see that equation (4.4) on page 58 follows.

E ND OF EXAMPLE 4.1
67
5
Electromagnetic Fields from Arbitrary Source Distributions
While, in principle, the electric and magnetic elds can be calculated from the Maxwell equations in chapter 1, or even from the wave equations in chapter 2, it is often physically more lucid to calculate them from the electromagnetic potentials derived in chapter 3. In this chapter we will derive the electric and magnetic elds from the potentials. We recall that in order to nd the solution (3.33) for the generic inhomogeneous wave equation (3.17) on page 47 we presupposed the existence of a Fourier transform pair (3.18a) on page 48 for the generic source term f (t, x) = f (x) =

d f (x) eit

(5.1a) (5.1b)
1 2
dt f (t, x) eit
That such transform pairs exist is true for most physical variables which are neither strictly monotonically increasing nor strictly monotonically decreasing with time. For charge and current densities varying in time we can therefore, without loss of generality, work with individual Fourier components (x) and j (x), respectively. Strictly speaking, the existence of a single Fourier component assumes a monochromatic source (i.e., a source containing only one single frequency component), which in turn requires that the electric and magnetic elds exist for innitely long times. However, by taking the proper limits, we may still use this approach even for sources and elds of nite duration.
69
5. Electromagnetic Fields from Arbitrary Source Distributions
This is the method we shall utilise in this chapter in order to derive the electric and magnetic elds in vacuum from arbitrary given charge densities (t, x) and current densities j(t, x), dened by the temporal Fourier transform pairs (t, x) = (x) = and j(t, x) = j (x) =

d (x) eit

(5.2a) (5.2b)
1 2
dt (t, x) eit
d j (x) eit

(5.3a) (5.3b)
1 2
dt j(t, x) eit
under the assumption that only retarded potentials produce physically acceptable solutions. The temporal Fourier transform pair for the retarded scalar potential can then be written (t, x) = (x) =

d (x) eit

(5.4a) 1 40 d3x (x )
V
1 2
dt (t, x) eit =
eik|xx | |x x |
(5.4b)
where in the last step, we made use of the explicit expression for the temporal Fourier transform of the generic potential component (x), equation (3.30) on page 50. Similarly, the following Fourier transform pair for the vector potential must exist: A(t, x) = A (x) =

d A (x) eit

(5.5a) 0 4 d3x j (x )
V
1 2
dt A(t, x) eit =
eik|xx | |x x |
(5.5b)
Similar transform pairs exist for the elds themselves. In the limit that the sources can be considered monochromatic containing only one single frequency 0 , we have the much simpler expressions (t, x) = 0 (x)ei0 t j(t, x) = j0 (x)e
i0 t i0 t i0 t
(5.6a) (5.6b) (5.6c) (5.6d)
(t, x) = 0 (x)e
A(t, x) = A0 (x)e
70
The magnetic eld
where again the real-valuedness of all these quantities is implied. As discussed above, we can safely assume that all formulae derived for a general temporal Fourier representation of the source (general distribution of frequencies in the source) are valid for these simple limiting cases. We note that in this context, we can make the formal identication = 0 ( 0 ), j = j0 ( 0 ) etc., and that we therefore, without any loss of stringency, let 0 mean the same as the Fourier amplitude and so on.
5.1 The magnetic eld

Let us now compute the magnetic eld from the vector potential, dened by equation (5.5a) and equation (5.5b) on page 70, and formula (3.6) on page 45: B(t, x) = A(t, x) (5.7)
The calculations are much simplied if we work in space and, at the nal stage, inverse Fourier transform back to ordinary t space. We are working in the Lorenz-Lorentz gauge and note that in space the Lorenz-Lorentz condition, equation (3.15) on page 47, takes the form k A i = 0 c
(5.8)
which provides a relation between (the Fourier transforms of) the vector and scalar potentials. Using the Fourier transformed version of equation (5.7) and equation (5.5b) on page 70, we obtain
B (x) = A (x) =
0 4
d3x j (x )
V
eik|xx | |x x |
(5.9)
71
Utilising formula (F.57) on page 181 and recalling that j (x ) does not depend on x, we can rewrite this as B (x) = 0 4 0 = 4 eik|xx | |x x | V xx eik|xx | d3x j (x ) |x x |3 V x x ik|xx | 1 + d3x j (x ) ik e x x x x| | | | V d3x j (x ) d3x
(5.10)
0 4
j (x )eik|xx | (x x ) |x x |3 V (ik)j (x )eik|xx | (x x ) + d3x |x x |2 V
From this expression for the magnetic eld in the frequency () domain, we obtain the total magnetic eld in the temporal (t) domain by taking the inverse Fourier transform (using the identity ik = i/c): B(t, x) = =

d B (x) eit d3x

V d j (x
0 4 + 1 c
V
)ei(tk|xx |) (x x )
0 4
|x x |2 j(tret , x ) (x x ) 0 j(tret , x ) (x x ) d3x + d3x 3 4c V |x x | |x x |2

V Induction eld Radiation eld
d3x
|x x |3 i(tk|xx |) (x x ) d (i)j (x )e
(5.11)
where
def j(tret , x )
j t
t=tret
(5.12)
and tret is given in equation (3.32) on page 50. The rst term, the induction eld, dominates near the current source but falls o rapidly with distance from it, is the electrodynamic version of the Biot-Savart law in electrostatics, formula (1.15) on page 8. The second term, the radiation eld or the far eld, dominates at large distances and represents energy that is transported out to innity. Note how the spatial derivatives () gave rise to a time derivative ()!
72
The electric eld
5.2 The electric eld

In order to calculate the electric eld, we use the temporally Fourier transformed version of formula (3.10) on page 45, inserting equations (5.4b) and (5.5b) as the explicit expressions for the Fourier transforms of and A: E (x) = (x) + iA (x) eik|xx | i0 1 d3x (x ) + 40 4 |x x | V ik|xx | (x )e 1 (x x ) = d3x 40 V |x x |3 = ik
V
d3x j (x )
V
eik|xx | |x x |
d3x
(x )(x x ) j (x ) c |x x |
eik|xx | |x x | (5.13)
Using the Fourier transform of the continuity equation (1.23) on page 10 j (x ) i (x ) = 0 (5.14) we see that we can express in terms of j as follows i (x ) = j (x ) (5.15) Doing so in the last term of equation (5.13) above, and also using the fact that k = /c, we can rewrite this equation as E (x) = 1 40 (x )eik|xx | (x x ) |x x |3 V 1 [ j (x )](x x ) d3x ikj (x ) c V |x x | d3x I The last vector-valued integral can be further rewritten in the following way: I = = But, since xm d3x
V
eik|xx | |x x |
(5.16)
d3x
V
eik|xx | [ j (x )](x x ) ikj (x ) |x x | |x x | ik|xx | jm xl xl e ik jl (x ) x l xm |x x | |x x | = xl xl ik|xx | e |x x |2 xl xl ik|xx | + jm e xm | x x | 2 jm xm
(5.17)
jm
xl xl ik|xx | e |x x |2
(5.18)
73
we can rewrite I as xm xl xl x l eik|xx | |x x |2 xl xl x l eik|xx | jm |x x |2 eik|xx | |x x |
I = +
d3x
V
jm xm
+ ikj
(5.19)
d3x
V
where, according to Gausss theorem, the last term vanishes if j is assumed to be limited and tends to zero at large distances. Further evaluation of the derivative in the rst term makes it possible to write 2 eik|xx | + j (x x ) (x x )eik|xx | 2 |x x | |x x |4 j (x x ) (x x ) |x x |3 eik|xx | + j eik|xx | |x x | (5.20) Using the triple product bac-cab formula (F.51) on page 180 backwards, and inserting the resulting expression for I into equation (5.16) on page 73, we arrive at the following nal expression for the Fourier transform of the total E eld: 1 eik|xx | i0 d3x (x ) + 40 4 |x x | V ik|xx | 1 ( x x ) ( x ) e = d3x 3 40 V |x x | 1 c 1 + c ik c + d3x eik|xx | |x x |
I =
d3x
V
ik
V
d3x
E (x) =
d3x j (x )
V
[j (x )eik|xx | (x x )](x x ) |x x |4 V [j (x )eik|xx | (x x )] (x x ) d3x |x x |4 V [j (x )eik|xx | (x x )] (x x ) d3x |x x |3 V (5.21)
Taking the inverse Fourier transform of equation (5.21), once again using the vacuum relation = kc, we nd, at last, the expression in time domain for the
74
The radiation elds
total electric eld: E(t, x) = =

d E (x) eit d3x

V
1 40 +
(tret , x )(x x ) |x x |3 d3x [j(tret , x ) (x x )](x x ) |x x |4

Intermediate eld
Retarded Coulomb eld
1 40 c 1 40 c
(5.22)
d3x
V
[j(tret , x ) (x x )] (x x ) |x x |4
Intermediate eld
1 + 40 c2
d3x
V
[ j(tret , x ) (x x )] (x x ) |x x |3
Radiation eld
Here, the rst term represents the retarded Coulomb eld and the last term represents the radiation eld which carries energy over very large distances. The other two terms represent an intermediate eld which contributes only in the near zone and must be taken into account there. With this we have achieved our goal of nding closed-form analytic expressions for the electric and magnetic elds when the sources of the elds are completely arbitrary, prescribed distributions of charges and currents. The only assumption made is that the advanced potentials have been discarded; recall the discussion following equation (3.33) on page 50 in chapter 3.
5.3 The radiation elds

In this section we study electromagnetic radiation, i.e., those parts of the electric and magnetic elds, calculated above, which are capable of carrying energy and momentum over large distances. We shall therefore make the assumption that the observer is located in the far zone, i.e., very far away from the source region(s). The elds which are dominating in this zone are by denition the radiation elds. From equation (5.11) on page 72 and equation (5.22) above, which give the
75
total electric and magnetic elds, we obtain Brad (t, x) =

d Brad (x) eit =
0 4c
d3x
V
j(tret , x ) (x x ) |x x |2 (5.23a)
Erad (t, x) =
d Erad (x) eit [ j(tret , x ) (x x )] (x x ) dx |x x |3

3
1 = 40 c2 where
def j(tret , x )
(5.23b)
j t
t=tret
(5.24)
Instead of studying the elds in the time domain, we can often make a spectrum analysis into the frequency domain and study each Fourier component separately. A superposition of all these components and a transformation back to the time domain will then yield the complete solution. The Fourier representation of the radiation elds equation (5.23a) and equation (5.23b) above were included in equation (5.10) on page 72 and equation (5.21) on page 74, respectively and are explicitly given by 1 dt Brad (t, x) eit 2 k0 j (x ) (x x ) ik|xx | e = i d3x 4 V |x x |2 0 j (x ) k ik|xx | = i e d3x 4 V |x x | 1 Erad dt Erad (t, x) eit (x) = 2 k [j (x ) (x x )] (x x ) ik|xx | = i e d3x 40 c V |x x |3 1 [j (x ) k] (x x ) ik|xx | = i d3x e 40 c V |x x |2 Brad (x) =
(5.25a)
(5.25b)
= k(x x )/ |x x |. where we used the fact that k = k k If the source is located near a point x0 inside a volume V and has such a limited spatial extent that max |x x0 | |x x |, and the integration surface S , centred on x0 , has a large enough radius |x x0 | max |x x0 |, we see from
76
The radiation elds
dS = d2x n k
S (x0 )
xx x x0 x x x0 x0
V O
F IGURE 5.1: Relation between the surface normal and the k vector for radiation generated at source points x near the point x0 in the source volume V . At distances much larger than the extent of V , the unit vector n , normal to the surface of the radiation k vector from S which has its centre at x0 , and the unit vector k x are nearly coincident.
gure 5.1 that we can approximate k x x k (x x ) k (x x0 ) k (x x0 ) k |x x0 | k (x x0 ) Recalling from Formula (F.45) and formula (F.46) on page 180 that dS = |x x0 |2 d = |x x0 |2 sin d d and n and noting from gure 5.1 that k are nearly parallel, we see that we can approximate dS k d2x kn d |x x0 |2 |x x0 |2 (5.27) (5.26)
Both these approximations will be used in the following. Within approximation (5.26) the expressions (5.25a) and (5.25b) for the radi-
77
ation elds can be approximated as Brad (x) i j (x ) k ik(x x0 ) 0 ik|xx0 | e e d3x 4 |x x | V (5.28a) 0 eik|xx0 | d3x [j (x ) k] eik(x x0 ) i 4 |x x0 | V 1 [j (x ) k] (x x ) ik(x x0 ) Erad e eik|xx0 | d3x (x) i 40 c |x x |2 V 1 eik|xx0 | (x x0 ) i d3x [j (x ) k] eik(x x0 ) 40 c |x x0 | |x x0 | V (5.28b)
I.e., if max |x x0 | |x x |, then the elds can be approximated as spherical waves multiplied by dimensional and angular factors, with integrals over points in the source volume only.
5.4 Radiated energy

Let us consider the energy that is carried in the radiation elds Brad , equation (5.25a), and Erad , equation (5.25b) on page 76. We have to treat signals with limited lifetime and hence nite frequency bandwidth dierently from monochromatic signals.
5.4.1 Monochromatic signals

If the source is strictly monochromatic, we can obtain the temporal average of the radiated power P directly, simply by averaging over one period so that S = EH = 1 1 Re {E B } = Re E eit (B eit ) 20 20 1 1 it it = Re E B e = Re E B e 20 20
(5.29)
Using the far-eld approximations (5.28a) and (5.28b) and the fact that 1/c = 0 0 and R0 = 0 /0 according to the denition (2.26) on page 31, we obtain S = 1 1 R0 2 32 |x x0 |2
2
d3x (j k)eik(x x0 )
V
x x0 |x x0 |
(5.30)
78
Radiated energy
or, making use of (5.27) on page 77, 1 dP = R0 d 322

2
d3x (j k)eik(x x0 )
V
(5.31)
which is the radiated power per unit solid angle.
5.4.2 Finite bandwidth signals

A signal with nite pulse width in time (t) domain has a certain spread in frequency () domain. To calculate the total radiated energy we need to integrate over the whole bandwidth. The total energy transmitted through a unit area is the time integral of the Poynting vector:

dt S(t) = =
dt (E H)

dt (E H ) e
i(+ )t
(5.32)
If we carry out the temporal integration rst and use the fact that

dt ei(+ )t = 2( + )
(5.33)
equation (5.32) can be written [cf. Parsevals identity]

dt S(t) = 2 = 2 = 2 = 2 2 = 0 2 = 0
d (E H )
0 0 0 0 0
d (E H ) + d (E H ) d (E H ) +
d (E H ) d (E H ) (5.34) d (E H )
0 0
d (E B + E B )
d (E B + E B )
where the last step follows from physical requirement of real-valuedness of E and B . We insert the Fourier transforms of the eld components which dominate at large distances, i.e., the radiation elds (5.25a) and (5.25b). The result, after
79
integration over the area S of a large sphere which encloses the source volume V , is U= 1 4 0 0 d2x n
S 0
d
V
d3x
j k ik|xx | e |x x |
(5.35)
Inserting the approximations (5.26) and (5.27) into equation (5.35) above and also introducing U=
0
dU
(5.36)
and recalling the denition (2.26) on page 31 for the vacuum resistance R0 we obtain dU 1 d R0 d 4
2
d3x (j k)eik(x x0 )
V
(5.37)
which, at large distances, is a good approximation to the energy that is radiated per unit solid angle d in a frequency band d. It is important to notice that Formula (5.37) includes only source coordinates. This means that the amount of energy that is being radiated is independent on the distance to the source (as long as it is large).
5.5 Bibliography
[1] F. H OYLE , S IR AND J. V. NARLIKAR, Lectures on Cosmology and Action at a Distance Electrodynamics, World Scientic Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd, Singapore, New Jersey, London and Hong Kong, 1996, ISBN 9810-02-2573-3(pbk). [2] J. D. JACKSON, Classical Electrodynamics, third ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1999, ISBN 0-471-30932-X. [3] L. D. L ANDAU AND E. M. L IFSHITZ, The Classical Theory of Fields, fourth revised English ed., vol. 2 of Course of Theoretical Physics, Pergamon Press, Ltd., Oxford . . . , 1975, ISBN 0-08-025072-6. [4] W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026. [5] J. A. S TRATTON, Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY and London, 1953, ISBN 07-062150-0.
80
6
Electromagnetic Radiation and Radiating Systems
In chapter 3 we were able to derive general expressions for the scalar and vector potentials from which we then, in chapter 5, calculated the total electric and magnetic elds from arbitrary distributions of charge and current sources. The only limitation in the calculation of the elds was that the advanced potentials were discarded. Thus, one can, at least in principle, calculate the radiated elds, Poynting ux, energy and other electromagnetic quantities for an arbitrary current density Fourier component and then add these Fourier components together to construct the complete electromagnetic eld at any time at any point in space. However, in practice, it is often dicult to evaluate the source integrals unless the current has a simple distribution in space. In the general case, one has to resort to approximations. We shall consider both these situations.
6.1 Radiation from an extended source volume at rest

Certain radiating systems have a symmetric geometry or are in any other way simple enough that a direct (semi-)analytic calculation of the radiated elds and energy is possible. This is for instance the case when the radiating current ows in a nite, conducting medium of simple geometry at rest such as in a stationary antenna.
81
6. Electromagnetic Radiation and Radiating Systems
6.1.1 Radiation from a one-dimensional current distribution

Let us apply equation (5.31) on page 79 to calculate the radiated EM power from a one-dimensional, time-varying current. Such a current can be set up by feeding the EMF of a generator (eg., a transmitter) onto a stationary, linear, straight, thin, conducting wire across a very short gap at its centre. Due to the EMF the charges in this thin wire of nite length L are set into motion to produce a time-varying antenna current which is the source of the EM radiation. Linear antennas of this type are called dipole antennas. For simplicity, we assume that the conductor resistance and the energy loss due to the electromagnetic radiation are negligible. Choosing our coordinate system such that the x3 axis is along the antenna axis, the antenna current can be represented as j(t , x ) = ( x1 )( x2 ) J (t , x3 ) x 3 (measured in A/m2 ) where J (t , x3 ) is the current (measured in A) along the antenna wire. Since we can assume that the antenna wire is innitely thin, the current must vanish at the endpoints L/2 and L/2 and is equal to the supplied current at the midpoint where the antenna is fed across a very short gap in the antenna wire. For each Fourier frequency component 0 , the antenna current J (t , x3 ) can be written as I ( x3 ) exp{i0 t } so that the antenna current density can be represented as j(t , x ) = j0 (x ) exp{i0 t } [cf. equations (5.6) on page 70] where j0 (x ) = ( x1 )( x2 )I ( x3 ) (6.1)
and where the spatially varying Fourier amplitude I ( x3 ) of the antenna current fulls the time-independent wave equation (Helmholtz equation) d2 I + k 2 I ( x3 ) = 0 , d x32 I (L/2) = I (L/2) = 0 , I (0) = I0 (6.2)
This equation has the well-known solution I ( x3 ) = I0 sin[k(L/2 x3 )] sin(kL/2) (6.3)
where I0 is the amplitude of the antenna current (measured in A), assumed to be constant and supplied by the generator/transmitter at the antenna feed point (in our case the midpoint of the antenna wire) and 1/ sin(kL/2) is a normalisation factor. The antenna current forms a standing wave as indicated in gure 6.1 on page 83. When the antenna is short we can approximate the current distribution formula (6.3) by the rst term in its Taylor expansion, i.e., by I0 (1 2| x3 |/L). For a half-wave antenna (L = /2 kL = ) formula (6.3) above simplies to I0 cos(kx3 ). Hence, in the most general case of a straight, innitely thin antenna of nite, arbitrary length L directed along the x3 axis, the Fourier amplitude of the
82
Radiation from an extended source volume at rest
sin[k(L/2 x3 )]
L 2
j(t , x )
L 2
F IGURE 6.1: A linear antenna used for transmission. The current in the feeder and the antenna wire is set up by the EMF of the generator (the transmitter). At the ends of the wire, the current is reected back with a 180 phase shift to produce a antenna current in the form of a standing wave.
antenna current density is j0 (x ) = I0 ( x1 )( x2 ) sin[k(L/2 x3 )] x 3 sin(kL/2) (6.4)
For a halfwave dipole antenna (L = /2), the antenna current density is simply j0 (x ) = I0 ( x1 )( x2 ) cos(kx3 ) while for a short antenna (L ) it can be approximated by (6.6) (6.5)
j0 (x ) = I0 ( x1 )( x2 )(1 2 x3 /L)
In the case of a travelling wave antenna, in which one end of the antenna is connected to ground via a resistance so that the current at this end does not vanish, the Fourier amplitude of the antenna current density is j0 (x ) = I0 ( x1 )( x2 ) exp(kx3 ) (6.7)
In order to evaluate formula (5.31) on page 79 with the explicit monochromatic current (6.4) inserted, we use a spherical polar coordinate system as in gure 6.2
83
r x3 = z
L 2
j (x )
k x2
x1 L 2
F IGURE 6.2: We choose a spherical polar coordinate system (r = |x| , , ) and arrange it so that the linear electric dipole antenna axis (and thus the antenna current density j ) is along the polar axis with the feed point at the origin.
on page 84 to evaluate the source integral

2
d3x j0 k eik(x x0 )
V
=
2 = I0
L/2 L/2
d x3 I0
sin[k(L/2 x3 )] k sin eikx3 cos eikx0 cos sin(kL/2)

2 L/2
k2 sin2 eikx0 cos sin2 (kL/2)
2
0
d x3 sin[k(L/2 x3 )] cos(kx3 cos )

2
2 = 4I0
cos[(kL/2) cos ] cos(kL/2) sin sin(kL/2)
(6.8) Inserting this expression and d = 2 sin d into formula (5.31) on page 79 and integrating over , we nd that the total radiated power from the antenna is
2 P(L) = R0 I0
1 4
cos[(kL/2) cos ] cos(kL/2) sin sin(kL/2)
sin
(6.9)
84
One can show that

kL0
lim P(L) =
12
2 2 R0 I0
(6.10)
where is the vacuum wavelength. The quantity Rrad (L) = P(L) P(L) = 1 2 = R0 2 6 Ieff 2 I0 L
2
197
(6.11)
is called the radiation resistance. For the technologically important case of a half-wave antenna, i.e., for L = /2 or kL = , formula (6.9) on page 84 reduces to 1 cos2 2 cos d (6.12) 4 0 sin The integral in (6.12) can always be evaluated numerically. But, it can in fact also be evaluated analytically as follows:
2 P(/2) = R0 I0 0
cos2
1 cos2 u cos 2 d = [cos u] = du = 2 sin 1 1 u 1 + cos(u) u = cos2 2 2 1 1 1 + cos(u) = du 2 1 (1 + u)(1 u) 1 1 1 + cos(u) 1 1 1 + cos(u) du + du = 4 1 (1 + u) 4 1 (1 u) 1 1 1 + cos(u) v = du = 1 + u 2 1 (1 + u) 1 2 1 cos v 1 = dv = [ + ln 2 Ci(2)] 2 0 v 2 1.22
(6.13) where in the last step the Euler-Mascheroni constant = 0.5772 . . . and the cosine integral Ci( x) were introduced. Inserting this into the expression equation (6.12) we obtain the value Rrad (/2) 73 .
6.1.2 Radiation from a two-dimensional current distribution

As an example of a two-dimensional current distribution we consider a circular loop antenna and calculate the radiated elds from such an antenna. We choose
85
r x3 = z = z x k x2 z j (x ) x1
F IGURE 6.3: For the loop antenna the spherical coordinate system (r, , ) describes the eld point x (the radiation eld) and the cylindrical coordinate system ( , , z ) describes the source point x (the antenna current).
the Cartesian coordinate system x1 x2 x3 with its origin at the centre of the loop as in gure 6.3 According to equation (5.28a) on page 78 the Fourier component of the radiation part of the magnetic eld generated by an extended, monochromatic current source is Brad = i0 eik|x| 4 |x| d3x eikx j k
V
(6.14)
In our case the generator produces a single frequency and we feed the antenna across a small gap where the loop crosses the positive x1 axis. The circumference of the loop is chosen to be exactly one wavelength = 2c/. This means that the antenna current oscillates in the form of a sinusoidal standing current wave around the circular loop with a Fourier amplitude j = I0 cos ( a)(z ) (6.15)
For the spherical coordinate system of the eld point, we recall from subsec-
86
tion F.4.1 on page 180 that the following relations between the base vectors hold: r = sin cos x 1 + sin sin x 2 + cos x 3 = cos cos x 1 + cos sin x 2 sin x 3 = sin x 1 + cos x 2 and sin x 1 = sin cos r + cos cos + cos x 2 = sin sin r + cos sin x 3 = cos r sin With the use of the above transformations and trigonometric identities, we obtain for the cylindrical coordinate system which describes the source: = cos x 1 + sin x 2 + sin( ) = sin cos( ) r + cos cos( ) = sin x 1 + cos x 2 + cos( ) = sin sin( ) r cos sin( ) z =x 3 = cos r sin (6.16) (6.17) (6.18)
This choice of coordinate systems means that k = k r and x = a so that k x = ka sin cos( ) and + cos sin( ) k = k[cos( ) ] (6.20) (6.19)
With these expressions inserted, recalling that in cylindrical coordinates d3x = d d dz , the source integral becomes d3x eikx j k = a = I0 ak
2 0 2 0 2 0
d eika sin cos( ) I0 cos k (6.21)
eika sin cos( ) cos( ) cos d eika sin cos( ) sin( ) cos d
+ I0 ak cos
Utilising the periodicity of the integrands over the integration interval [0, 2], introducing the auxiliary integration variable = , and utilising standard
87
trigonometric identities, the rst integral in the RHS of (6.21) can be rewritten
2 0
eika sin cos cos cos( + ) d

2 0 2 0
= cos = cos =
eika sin cos cos2 d + a vanishing integral eika sin cos 1 1 + cos 2 2 2 d (6.22)
2 1 cos eika sin cos d 2 0 2 1 + cos eika sin cos cos(2 ) d 2 0
Analogously, the second integral in the RHS of (6.21) can be rewritten

2 0
eika sin cos sin cos( + ) d

2 1 sin eika sin cos d 2 0 2 1 sin eika sin cos cos 2 d 2 0
(6.23)
As is well-known from the theory of Bessel functions, Jn () = (1)n Jn () Jn () =

2 0 2 0
in
ei cos cos n d =
in 2
2 0
ei cos cos n d
(6.24)
which means that eika sin cos d = 2 J0 (ka sin ) eika sin cos cos 2 d = 2 J2 (ka sin ) (6.25)
Putting everything together, we nd that

V
d3x eikx j k = I +I = I0 ak cos [ J0 (ka sin ) J2 (ka sin )] + I0 ak cos sin [ J0 (ka sin ) + J2 (ka sin )] (6.26)
so that, in spherical coordinates where |x| = r, Brad (x) = i0 eikr I +I 4r (6.27)
88
Radiation from a localised source volume at rest
To obtain the desired physical magnetic eld in the radiation (far) zone we must Fourier transform back to t space and take the real part and evaluate it at the retarded time: Brad (t, x) = Re = i0 e(ikrt ) I +I 4r
0 sin(kr t ) I +I 4r I0 ak0 = sin(kr t ) cos [ J0 (ka sin ) J2 (ka sin )] 4r + cos sin [ J0 (ka sin ) + J2 (ka sin )] (6.28)
From this expression for the radiated B eld, we can obtain the radiated E eld with the help of Maxwells equations.
6.2 Radiation from a localised source volume at rest

In the general case, and when we are interested in evaluating the radiation far from a source at rest and which is localised in a small volume, we can introduce an approximation which leads to a multipole expansion where individual terms can be evaluated analytically. We shall use Hertz method to obtain this expansion.
6.2.1 The Hertz potential

Let us consider the equation of continuity, which, according to expression (1.23) on page 10, can be written (t, x) + j(t, x) = 0 t (6.29)
In section 4.1.1 we introduced the electric polarisation P(t, x) such that P = pol , the polarisation charge density. If we introduce a vector eld (t, x) such that = true = jtrue t (6.30a) (6.30b)
89
and compare with equation (6.29) on page 89, we see that (t, x) satises this equation of continuity. Furthermore, if we compare with the electric polarisation [cf. equation (4.9) on page 59], we see that the quantity is related to the true charges in the same way as P is related to polarised charge, namely as a dipole moment density. The quantity is referred to as the polarisation vector since, formally, it treats also the true (free) charges as polarisation charges so that E= true + pol P = 0 0 (6.31)
We introduce a further potential e with the following property e = 1 e =A c2 t (6.32a) (6.32b)
where and A are the electromagnetic scalar and vector potentials, respectively. As we see, e acts as a super-potential in the sense that it is a potential from which we can obtain other potentials. It is called the Hertz vector or polarisation potential. Requiring that the scalar and vector potentials and A, respectively, full their inhomogeneous wave equations, one nds, using (6.30) and (6.32), that Hertz vector must satisfy the inhomogeneous wave equation
2
e =
1 2 e 2 e = c2 t2 0
(6.33)
This equation is of the same type as equation (3.17) on page 47, and has therefore the retarded solution e (t, x) = 1 40 d3x
V
(tret , x ) |x x | (x )eik|xx | |x x |
(6.34)
with Fourier components e (x) = 1 40 d3x

V
(6.35)
If we introduce the help vector C such that C = e (6.36)
we see that we can calculate the magnetic and electric elds, respectively, as follows B= 1 C c2 t (6.37a) (6.37b)
E=C
90
xx x x0 x x x0 V x x0
O
F IGURE 6.4: Geometry of a typical multipole radiation problem where the eld point x is located some distance away from the nite source volume V centred around x0 . If k |x x0 | 1 k |x x0 |, then the radiation at x is well approximated by a few terms in the multipole expansion.
Clearly, the last equation is valid only outside the source volume, where E = 0. Since we are mainly interested in the elds in the far zone, a long distance from the source region, this is no essential limitation. Assume that the source region is a limited volume around some central point x0 far away from the eld (observation) point x illustrated in gure 6.4. Under these assumptions, we can expand the Hertz vector, expression (6.35) on page 90, due to the presence of non-vanishing (tret , x ) in the vicinity of x0 , in a formal series. For this purpose we recall from potential theory that eik|xx | eik|(xx0 )(x x0 )| |x x | |(x x0 ) (x x0 )|
(6.38) x0 )h(1) n ( k |x x0 |)
= ik (2n + 1)Pn (cos ) jn (k x

n=0
where (see gure 6.4) eik|xx | is a Green function |x x | is the angle between x x0 and x x0 Pn (cos ) is the Legendre polynomial of order n jn (k x x0 ) is the spherical Bessel function of the rst kind of order n h(1) n (k |x x0 |) is the spherical Hankel function of the rst kind of order n According to the addition theorem for Legendre polynomials Pn (cos ) =
m=n m im( ) (1)m Pm n (cos ) Pn (cos )e n
(6.39)
91
where Pm n is an associated Legendre polynomial and, in spherical polar coordinates, x x0 = ( x x0 , , ) x x0 = (|x x0 | , , ) (6.40a) (6.40b)
Inserting equation (6.38) on page 91, together with formula (6.39) on page 91, into equation (6.35) on page 90, we can in a formally exact way expand the Fourier component of the Hertz vector as e = ik 40
V m im (2n + 1)(1)m h(1) n (k |x x0 |) Pn (cos ) e 3 m x0 ) P n (cos n
n=0 m=n
(6.41)
d x (x ) jn (k x
)e
im
We notice that there is no dependence on x x0 inside the integral; the integrand is only dependent on the relative source vector x x0 . We are interested in the case where the eld point is many wavelengths away from the well-localised sources, i.e., when the following inequalities k x x0 1 k |x x0 | (6.42)
hold. Then we may to a good approximation replace h(1) n with the rst term in its asymptotic expansion:
n+1 h(1) n (k |x x0 |) (i)
eik|xx0 | k |x x0 |
(6.43)
and replace jn with the rst term in its power series expansion: jn (k x x0 ) 2n n! k x x0 (2n + 1)!
n
(6.44)
Inserting these expansions into equation (6.41), we obtain the multipole expansion of the Fourier component of the Hertz vector
e where
n=0
(n) e
(6.45a)
(n) n e = (i)
1 eik|xx0 | 2n n! 40 |x x0 | (2n)!
d3x (x ) (k x x0 )n Pn (cos ) (6.45b)
92
k x3 x Erad Brad
p r x2 x1
F IGURE 6.5: If a spherical polar coordinate system (r, , ) is chosen such that the electric dipole moment p (and thus its Fourier transform p ) is located at the origin and directed along the polar axis, the calculations are simplied.
This expression is approximately correct only if certain care is exercised; if many (n) e terms are needed for an accurate result, the expansions of the spherical Hankel and Bessel functions used above may not be consistent and must be replaced by more accurate expressions. Taking the inverse Fourier transform of e will yield the Hertz vector in time domain, which inserted into equation (6.36) on page 90 will yield C. The resulting expression can then in turn be inserted into equations (6.37) on page 90 in order to obtain the radiation elds. For a linear source distribution along the polar axis, = in expression (6.45b) on page 92, and Pn (cos ) gives the angular distribution of the radiation. In the general case, however, the angular distribution must be computed with the help of formula (6.39) on page 91. Let us now study the lowest order contributions to the expansion of Hertz vector.
6.2.2 Electric dipole radiation

Choosing n = 0 in expression (6.45b) on page 92, we obtain
(0) e =
eik|xx0 | 40 |x x0 |
d3x (x ) =
1 eik|xx0 | p 40 |x x0 |
(6.46)
93
Since represents a dipole moment density for the true charges (in the same vein as P does so for the polarised charges), p = V d3x (x ) is the Fourier component of the electric dipole moment p(t, x0 ) =
V
d3x (t , x ) =
d3x (x x0 )(t , x )
V
(6.47)
[cf. equation (4.2) on page 58 which describes the static dipole moment]. If a spherical coordinate system is chosen with its polar axis along p as in gure 6.5 (0) on page 93, the components of e are 1 eik|xx0 | p cos 40 |x x0 | def 1 eik|xx0 | e (0) e p sin = 40 |x x0 |
e (0) e = r r def e (0) e =0 def
(6.48a) (6.48b) (6.48c)
Evaluating formula (6.36) on page 90 for the help vector C, with the spheri(0) cally polar components (6.48) of e inserted, we obtain
(0) C = C, =
1 40
1 ik |x x0 |
eik|xx0 | p sin |x x0 |
(6.49)
Applying this to equations (6.37) on page 90, we obtain directly the Fourier components of the elds B = i 0 1 eik|xx0 | ik p sin 4 |x x0 | |x x0 | 1 ik x x0 1 E = 2 cos 2 40 |x x0 | |x x0 | |x x0 | ik|xx0 | ik 1 2 e k sin p + |x x0 | |x x0 |2 |x x0 | (6.50a)
(6.50b)
Keeping only those parts of the elds which dominate at large distances (the radiation elds) and recalling that the wave vector k = k(x x0 )/ |x x0 | where k = /c, we can now write down the Fourier components of the radiation parts of the magnetic and electric elds from the dipole: Brad = Erad 0 eik|xx0 | 0 eik|xx0 | p k sin = (p k) (6.51a) 4 |x x0 | 4 |x x0 | ik|xx0 | 1 eik|xx0 | = 1 e = p k2 sin [(p k) k] (6.51b) 40 |x x0 | 40 |x x0 |
These elds constitute the electric dipole radiation, also known as E1 radiation.
94
6.2.3 Magnetic dipole radiation

The next term in the expression (6.45b) on page 92 for the expansion of the Fourier transform of the Hertz vector is for n = 1:
(1) e = i
eik|xx0 | d3x k x x0 (x ) cos 40 |x x0 | V 1 eik|xx0 | d3x [(x x0 ) (x x0 )] (x ) = ik 40 |x x0 |2 V
(6.52)
Here, the term [(x x0 ) (x x0 )] (x ) can be rewritten [(x x0 ) (x x0 )] (x ) = ( xi x0,i )( xi x0,i ) (x ) and introducing i = xi x0,i i = xi x0,i
(1) the jth component of the integrand in e can be broken up into
(6.53)
(6.54a) (6.54b)
{[(x x0 ) (x x0 )] (x )} j =
1 i , j i + ,i j 2 1 + i , j i ,i j 2
(6.55)
i.e., as the sum of two parts, the rst being symmetric and the second antisymmetric in the indices i, j. We note that the antisymmetric part can be written as 1 1 i , j i ,i j = [, j (i i ) j (i ,i )] 2 2 1 = [ ( ) ( )] j 2 1 = (x x0 ) [ (x x0 )] 2
(6.56)
j
The utilisation of equations (6.30) on page 89, and the fact that we are considering a single Fourier component, (t, x) = eit allow us to express in j as = i j (6.58) (6.57)
95
Hence, we can write the antisymmetric part of the integral in formula (6.52) on page 95 as 1 (x x0 ) d3x (x ) (x x0 ) 2 V 1 = i (x x0 ) d3x j (x ) (x x0 ) 2 V 1 = i (x x0 ) m where we introduced the Fourier transform of the magnetic dipole moment m = 1 2 d3x (x x0 ) j (x )
V
(6.59)
(6.60)
(1) The nal result is that the antisymmetric, magnetic dipole, part of e can be written ,antisym e (1)
k eik|xx0 | (x x0 ) m 40 |x x0 |2
(6.61)
In analogy with the electric dipole case, we insert this expression into equation (6.36) on page 90 to evaluate C, with which equations (6.37) on page 90 then gives the B and E elds. Discarding, as before, all terms belonging to the near elds and transition elds and keeping only the terms that dominate at large distances, we obtain 0 eik|xx0 | (m k) k 4 |x x0 | k eik|xx0 | Erad m k (x) = 40 c |x x0 | Brad (x) = which are the elds of the magnetic dipole radiation (M1 radiation). (6.62a) (6.62b)
6.2.4 Electric quadrupole radiation

e,sym (1) The symmetric part of the n = 1 contribution in the equation (6.45b) on page 92 for the expansion of the Hertz vector can be expressed in terms of the electric quadrupole tensor, which is dened in accordance with equation (4.3) on page 58:
Q(t, x0 ) =
d3x (x x0 )(x x0 )(tret , x )
(6.63)
96
Radiation from a localised charge in arbitrary motion
Again we use this expression in equation (6.36) on page 90 to calculate the elds via equations (6.37) on page 90. Tedious, but fairly straightforward algebra (which we will not present here), yields the resulting elds. The radiation components of the elds in the far eld zone (wave zone) are given by i0 eik|xx0 | (k Q ) k 8 |x x0 | i eik|xx0 | [(k Q ) k] k Erad ( x ) = 80 |x x0 | Brad (x) = (6.64a) (6.64b)
This type of radiation is called electric quadrupole radiation or E2 radiation.
6.3 Radiation from a localised charge in arbitrary motion

The derivation of the radiation elds for the case of the source moving relative to the observer is considerably more complicated than the stationary cases studied above. In order to handle this non-stationary situation, we use the retarded potentials (3.34) on page 50 in chapter 3 1 (tret , x ) d3x 40 V |x x | j ( t 0 ret , x ) A(t, x) = d3x 4 V |x x | (t, x) = (6.65a) (6.65b)
and consider a source region with such a limited spatial extent that the charges and currents are well localised. Specically, we consider a charge q , for instance an electron, which, classically, can be thought of as a localised, unstructured and rigid charge distribution with a small, nite radius. The part of this charge distribution dq which we are considering is located in dV = d3x in the sphere in gure 6.6 on page 98. Since we assume that the electron (or any other other similar electric charge) moves with a velocity v whose direction is arbitrary and whose magnitude can even be comparable to the speed of light, we cannot say that the charge and current to be used in (6.65) is V d3x (tret , x ) and V d3x v(tret , x ), respectively, because in the nite time interval during which the observed signal is generated, part of the charge distribution will leak out of the volume element d3x .
97
x(t) xx
dr v(t ) dS x (t ) q dV
F IGURE 6.6: Signals which are observed at the eld point x at time t were generated at source points x (t ) on a sphere, centred on x and expanding, as time increases, with the velocity c outward from the centre. The source charge element moves with an arbitrary velocity v and gives rise to a source leakage out of the source volume dV = d3x .
6.3.1 The Linard-Wiechert potentials

The charge distribution in gure 6.6 on page 98 which contributes to the eld at x(t) is located at x (t ) on a sphere with radius r = |x x | = c(t t ). The radius interval of this sphere from which radiation is received at the eld point x during the time interval (t , t + dt ) is (r , r + dr ) and the net amount of charge in this radial interval is dq = (tret , x ) dS dr (tret , x ) (x x ) v dS dt |x x | (6.66)
where the last term represents the amount of source leakage due to the fact that the charge distribution moves with velocity v(t ) = dx /dt . Since dt = dr /c and dS dr = d3x we can rewrite the expression for the net charge as dq = (tret , x ) d3x (tret , x ) (x x ) v 3 dx c |x x | (x x ) v = (tret , x ) 1 d3x c |x x |
(6.67)
98
or (tret , x ) d3x = dq 1
(xx )v c|xx |
(6.68)
which leads to the expression (tret , x ) 3 dq dx = |x x | |x x |

(xx )v c
(6.69)
This is the expression to be used in the formulae (6.65) on page 97 for the retarded potentials. The result is (recall that j = v) (t, x) = A(t, x) = 1 40 0 4 dq x )v |x x | (xc v dq x )v |x x | (xc (6.70a) (6.70b)
For a suciently small and well localised charge distribution we can, assuming that the integrands do not change sign in the integration volume, use the mean value theorem to evaluate these expressions to become 1 1 q 1 (6.71a) d3x dq = ( x x ) v 40 |x x | c 40 s V 1 v v v q A(t, x) = = (t, x) d3x dq = x )v 40 c2 |x x | (xc 40 c2 s c2 V (6.71b) (t, x) = where s = s(t , x) = x x (t ) [x x (t )] v(t ) c x x (t ) v(t ) = x x (t ) 1 c |x x (t )| x x (t ) v(t ) = [x x (t )] c |x x (t )| (6.72a) (6.72b) (6.72c)
is the retarded relative distance. The potentials (6.71) are precisely the LinardWiechert potentials which will be derived in section 7.3.2 on page 148 by using a relativistically covariant formalism. It should be noted that in the complicated derivation presented above, the observer is in a coordinate system which has an absolute meaning and the velocity v is that of the localised charge q , whereas, as we shall see later, in the covariant derivation, two reference frames of equal standing are moving relative to each other with v.
99
q x (t )
|x x | v c
x0 (t) 0
v(t )
x x0 xx x(t)
F IGURE 6.7: Signals which are observed at the eld point x at time t were generated at the source point x (t ). After time t the particle, which moves with nonuniform velocity, has followed a yet unknown trajectory. Extrapolating tangentially the trajectory from x (t ), based on the velocity v(t ), denes the virtual simultaneous coordinate x0 (t).
The Linard-Wiechert potentials are applicable to all problems where a spatially localised charge in arbitrary motion emits electromagnetic radiation, and we shall now study such emission problems. The electric and magnetic elds are calculated from the potentials in the usual way: B(t, x) = A(t, x) E(t, x) = (t, x) A(t, x) t (6.73a) (6.73b)
6.3.2 Radiation from an accelerated point charge

Consider a localised charge q and assume that its trajectory is known experimentally as a function of retarded time x = x (t ) (6.74)
(in the interest of simplifying our notation, we drop the subscript ret on t from now on). This means that we know the trajectory of the charge q , i.e., x , for all times up to the time t at which a signal was emitted in order to precisely arrive at the eld point x at time t. Because of the nite speed of propagation of the elds, the trajectory at times later than t cannot be known at time t.
100
The retarded velocity and acceleration at time t are given by v(t ) = dx dt dv d2 x = dt dt 2 (6.75a) (6.75b)
(t ) = a(t ) = v
As for the charge coordinate x itself, we have in general no knowledge of the velocity and acceleration at times later than t , and denitely not at the time of observation t! If we choose the eld point x as xed, application of (6.75) to the relative vector x x yields d [x x (t )] = v(t ) dt d2 (t ) [x x (t )] = v dt 2 (6.76a) (6.76b)
The retarded time t can, at least in principle, be calculated from the implicit relation |x x (t )| (6.77) c and we shall see later how this relation can be taken into account in the calculations. According to formulae (6.73) on page 100 the electric and magnetic elds are determined via dierentiation of the retarded potentials at the observation time t and at the observation point x. In these formulae the unprimed , i.e., the spatial derivative dierentiation operator = x i / xi means that we dierentiate with respect to the coordinates x = ( x1 , x2 , x3 ) while keeping t xed, and the unprimed time derivative operator /t means that we dierentiate with respect to t while keeping x xed. But the Linard-Wiechert potentials and A, equations (6.71) on page 99, are expressed in the charge velocity v(t ) given by equation (6.75a) above and the retarded relative distance s(t , x) given by equation (6.72) on page 99. This means that the expressions for the potentials and A contain terms which are expressed explicitly in t , which in turn is expressed implicitly in t via equation (6.77) above. Despite this complication it is possible, as we shall see below, to determine the electric and magnetic elds and associated quantities at the time of observation t. To this end, we need to investigate carefully the action of dierentiation on the potentials. t = t (t, x) = t
The dierential operator method

We introduce the convention that a dierential operator embraced by parentheses with an index x or t means that the operator in question is applied at constant x
101
and t, respectively. With this convention, we nd that t x x (t ) =

x
xx |x x |
x x (t ) =
x
(x x ) v(t ) |x x | (6.78)
Furthermore, by applying the operator (/t)x to equation (6.77) on page 101 we nd that t t =1
x
|x x (t (t, x))| c x t |x x | =1 t x c t (x x ) v(t ) t =1+ c |x x | t x t
(6.79)
x
This is an algebraic equation in (t /t)x which we can solve to obtain t t =

x
|x x | |x x | = s |x x | (x x ) v(t )/c
(6.80)
where s = s(t , x) is the retarded relative distance given by equation (6.72) on page 99. Making use of equation (6.80), we obtain the following useful operator identity t =
x
t t
=
x
|x x | s
(6.81)
x
Likewise, by applying ()t to equation (6.77) on page 101 we obtain ()t t = ()t xx |x x (t (t, x))| = ()t (x x ) c c |x x | xx (x x ) v(t ) = + ()t t c |x x | c |x x |
(6.82)
This is an algebraic equation in ()t t with the solution ()t t = xx cs (6.83)
which gives the following operator relation when ()t is acting on an arbitrary function of t and x: ()t = ()t t t + ()t =
x
xx cs
+ ()t
x
(6.84)
102
With the help of the rules (6.84) and (6.81) we are now able to replace t by t in the operations which we need to perform. We nd, for instance, that 1 q 40 s q xx v(t ) x x s = 40 s2 |x x | c cs t x A 0 q v(t ) A = t t x t 4 s x q s (t ) x x v(t ) = x x sv 2 3 40 c s t ()t =
(6.85a)
(6.85b)
x
Utilising these relations in the calculation of the E eld from the Linard-Wiechert potentials, equations (6.71) on page 99, we obtain E(t, x) = (t, x) A(t, x) t q [x x (t )] |x x (t )| v(t )/c = 40 s2 (t , x) |x x (t )| [x x (t )] |x x (t )| v(t )/c cs(t , x) s(t , x) t
x
(t ) |x x (t )| v 2 c (6.86)
Starting from expression (6.72a) on page 99 for the retarded relative distance s(t , x), we see that we can evaluate ( s/t )x in the following way s t (x x ) v(t ) xx t x c 1 [x x (t )] v(t ) = x x (t ) v(t ) + [x x (t )] t c t t 2 (t ) (x x ) v(t ) v (t ) (x x ) v = + c c |x x | (6.87) =
where equation (6.78) on page 102 and equations (6.75) on page 101, respectively, were used. Hence, the electric eld generated by an arbitrarily moving charged
103
particle at x (t ) is given by the expression E(t, x) = q 40 s3 (t , x) [x x (t )] |x x (t )| v(t ) c 1 v2 (t ) c2
Coulomb eld when v 0
q x x (t ) 40 s3 (t , x) c2
[x x (t )]
|x x (t )| v(t ) c
(t ) v (6.88)
Radiation (acceleration) eld
The rst part of the eld, the velocity eld, tends to the ordinary Coulomb eld when v 0 and does not contribute to the radiation. The second part of the eld, the acceleration eld, is radiated into the far zone and is therefore also called the radiation eld. From gure 6.7 on page 100 we see that the position the charged particle would have had if at t all external forces would have been switched o so that the trajectory from then on would have been a straight line in the direction of the tangent at x (t ) is x0 (t), the virtual simultaneous coordinate. During the arbitrary motion, we interpret x x0 (t) as the coordinate of the eld point x relative to the virtual simultaneous coordinate x0 (t). Since the time it takes for a signal to propagate (in the assumed vacuum) from x (t ) to x is |x x | /c, this relative vector is given by x x0 (t) = x x (t ) |x x (t )| v(t ) c (6.89)
This allows us to rewrite equation (6.88) above in the following way E(t, x) = q v2 ( x x ) 1 0 40 s3 c2 + (x x ) (x x0 ) v 2 c (6.90)
In a similar manner we can compute the magnetic eld: B(t, x) = A(t, x) ()t A = ()t A xx cs q xx A xx = v 40 c2 s2 |x x | c |x x | t x t A
x
(6.91)
where we made use of equation (6.71) on page 99 and formula (6.81) on page 102. But, according to (6.85a), xx q xx ()t = v c |x x | 40 c2 s2 |x x | (6.92)
104
so that B(t, x) = xx ()t c |x x | xx = E(t, x) c |x x | A t
(6.93)
The radiation part of the electric eld is obtained from the acceleration eld in formula (6.88) on page 104 as Erad (t, x) = =
|xx |
lim E(t, x) v (6.94)
q |x x | v (x x ) (x x ) 2 3 40 c s c q (t )} [x x (t )] {[x x0 (t)] v = 40 c2 s3
where in the last step we again used formula (6.89) on page 104. Using this formula and formula (6.93), the radiation part of the magnetic eld can be written Brad (t, x) = xx Erad (t, x) c |x x | (6.95)
The direct method

An alternative to the dierential operator transformation technique just described is to try to express all quantities in the potentials directly in t and x. An example of such a quantity is the retarded relative distance s(t , x). According to equation (6.72) on page 99, the square of this retarded relative distance can be written s2 (t , x) = x x (t ) 2 x x (t ) + [x x (t )] v(t ) c
2 2
[x x (t )] v(t ) c
(6.96) (6.97)
If we use the following handy identity (x x ) v c =

2
(x x ) v c
| x x | 2 v2 2 | x x | 2 v2 2 cos + sin c2 c2 | x x | 2 v2 | x x | 2 v2 2 2 = (cos + sin ) = c2 c2
(6.98)
105
we nd that (x x ) v c
2
|x x |2 v2 c2
(x x ) v c
(6.99)
Furthermore, from equation (6.89) on page 104, we obtain the following identity: [x x (t )] v = [x x0 (t)] v which, when inserted into equation (6.99) above, yields the relation (x x ) v c
2
(6.100)
|x x |2 v2 c2
(x x0 ) v c
(6.101)
Inserting the above into expression (6.96) on page 105 for s2 , this expression becomes s2 = x x =
2
2 xx |x x | v c
(x x ) v |x x |2 v2 + c c2
2
(x x0 ) v c
(x x )
(x x0 ) v c
= (x x0 )2 |x x0 (t)|2
(x x0 ) v c
[x x0 (t)] v(t ) c
(6.102) where in the penultimate step we used equation (6.89) on page 104. What we have just demonstrated is that if the particle velocity at time t can be calculated or projected from its value at the retarded time t , the retarded distance s in the Linard-Wiechert potentials (6.71) can be expressed in terms of the virtual simultaneous coordinate x0 (t), viz., the point at which the particle will have arrived at time t, i.e., when we obtain the rst knowledge of its existence at the source point x at the retarded time t , and in the eld coordinate x = x(t), where we make our observations. We have, in other words, shown that all quantities in the denition of s, and hence s itself, can, when the motion of the charge is somehow known, be expressed in terms of the time t alone. I.e., in this special case we are able to express the retarded relative distance as s = s(t, x) and we do not have to involve the retarded time t or any transformed dierential operators in our calculations. Taking the square root of both sides of equation (6.102), we obtain the following alternative nal expressions for the retarded relative distance s in terms of the
106
charges virtual simultaneous coordinate x0 (t) and velocity v(t ): s(t , x) = |x x0 (t)|2 1 [x x0 (t)] v(t ) c v2 (t ) 2 sin 0 (t) c2 v2 (t ) c2 + [x x0 (t)] v(t ) c
2 2
(6.103a) (6.103b) (6.103c)
= |x x0 (t)| =
|x x0 (t)|2 1
If we know what velocity the particle will have at time t, expression (6.103) above for s will not be dependent on t . Using equation (6.103c) and standard vector analytic formulae, we obtain s2 = |x x0 |2 1 = 2 (x x0 ) 1 = 2 (x x0 ) + v2 c2 + + (x x0 ) v c
2
v2 c2
vv (x x0 ) c2
(6.104)
v v (x x0 ) c c which we shall use in example 6.1 on page 128 for a uniform, unaccelerated motion of the charge.
Radiation for small velocities

If the charge moves at such low speeds that v/c simplies to (x x ) v xx , c and formula (6.89) on page 104 s= xx x x0 = (x x ) v 1, formula (6.72) on page 99 (6.105)
|x x | v xx , v c (6.106) c so that the radiation eld equation (6.94) on page 105 can be approximated by Erad (t, x) = 40 c2 q ], (x x ) [(x x ) v |x x |3 v c (6.107)
from which we obtain, with the use of formula (6.93) on page 105, the magnetic eld q Brad (t, x) = [ v (x x )], v c (6.108) 3 40 c |x x |2
107
It is interesting to note the close correspondence which exists between the nonrelativistic elds (6.107) and (6.108) and the electric dipole eld equations (6.51) on page 94 if we introduce p = q x (t ) and at the same time make the transitions =p 2 p qv x x = x x0 (6.110a) (6.110b) (6.109)
The power ux in the far zone is described by the Poynting vector as a function of Erad and Brad . We use the close correspondence with the dipole case to nd that it becomes S= v)2 0 q 2 ( xx sin2 2 2 x x | | 16 c |x x | (6.111)
and x x0 . The total radiated power (integrated where is the angle between v over a closed spherical surface) becomes P= 2 0 q 2 ( v)2 q 2v = 6c 60 c3 (6.112)
which is the Larmor formula for radiated power from an accelerated charge. Note that here we are treating a charge with v c but otherwise totally unspecied motion while we compare with formulae derived for a stationary oscillating dipole. The electric and magnetic elds, equation (6.107) on page 107 and equation (6.108) on page 107, respectively, and the expressions for the Poynting ux and power derived from them, are here instantaneous values, dependent on the instantaneous position of the charge at x (t ). The angular distribution is that which is frozen to the point from which the energy is radiated.
6.3.3 Bremsstrahlung
An important special case of radiation is when the velocity v and the acceleration are collinear (parallel or anti-parallel) so that v v = 0. This condition (for v an arbitrary magnitude of v) inserted into expression (6.94) on page 105 for the radiation eld, yields Erad (t, x) = q ], (x x ) [(x x ) v 40 c2 s3 v v (6.113)
108
v = 0.5c v = 0.25c v
v=0
F IGURE 6.8: Polar diagram of the energy loss angular distribution factor sin2 /(1 v cos /c)5 during bremsstrahlung for particle speeds v = 0, v = 0.25c, and v = 0.5c.
from which we obtain, with the use of formula (6.93) on page 105, the magnetic eld Brad (t, x) = q |x x | [ v (x x )], 40 c3 s3 v v (6.114)
The dierence between this case and the previous case of v c is that the approximate expression (6.105) on page 107 for s is no longer valid; we must instead use the correct expression (6.72) on page 99. The angular distribution of the power ux (Poynting vector) therefore becomes S= sin2 2 0 q 2 v 162 c |x x |2 1 v cos c xx |x x | (6.115)
It is interesting to note that the magnitudes of the electric and magnetic elds are are parallel or anti-parallel. the same whether v and v We must be careful when we compute the energy (S integrated over time). The Poynting vector is related to the time t when it is measured and to a xed surface in space. The radiated power into a solid angle element d, measured relative to the particles retarded position, is given by the formula dU rad () 0 q 2 v 2 sin2 d = S (x x ) x x d = dt 162 c 1 v cos c d (6.116)
109
dS dr x d q x2 vdt x1 x x2 + c dt
F IGURE 6.9: Location of radiation between two spheres as the charge moves with velocity v from x1 to x2 during the time interval (t , t + dt ). The observation point (eld point) is at the xed location x.
On the other hand, the radiation loss due to radiation from the charge at retarded time t : dU rad dU rad d = dt dt t t d
x
(6.117)
Using formula (6.80) on page 102, we obtain dU rad dU rad s d = S (x x ) s d d = dt dt |x x | (6.118)
Inserting equation (6.115) on page 109 for S into (6.118), we obtain the explicit expression for the energy loss due to radiation evaluated at the retarded time sin2 dU rad () 0 q 2 v 2 d = dt 162 c 1 v cos c
5
(6.119)
The angular factors of this expression, for three dierent particle speeds, are plotted in gure 6.8 on page 109. Comparing expression (6.116) on page 109 with expression (6.119) above, we see that they dier by a factor 1 v cos /c which comes from the extra factor s/ |x x | introduced in (6.118). Let us explain this in geometrical terms. During the interval (t , t + dt ) and within the solid angle element d the particle radiates an energy [dU rad ()/dt ] dt d. As shown in gure 6.9 this energy
110
is at time t located between two spheres, one outer with its origin at x1 (t ) and radius c(t t ), and one inner with its origin at x2 (t + dt ) = x1 (t ) + v dt and radius c[t (t + dt )] = c(t t dt ). From Figure 6.9 we see that the volume element subtending the solid angle element d = is d3x = dS dr = x x2
2
dS x x2
2
(6.120)
d dr
(6.121)
Here, dr denotes the dierential distance between the two spheres and can be evaluated in the following way dr = x x2 + c dt x x2 x x2 v dt x x2 v cos = c x x2 v x x2 dt = cs dt x x2 (6.122)
where formula (6.72) on page 99 was used in the last step. Hence, the volume element under consideration is d3x = dS dr = s dS cdt x x2 (6.123)
We see that the energy which is radiated per unit solid angle during the time interval (t , t + dt ) is located in a volume element whose size is dependent. This explains the dierence between expression (6.116) on page 109 and expression (6.119) on page 110. rad . After tedious, but Let the radiated energy, integrated over , be denoted U relatively straightforward integration of formula (6.119) on page 110, one obtains rad 0 q 2 v dU 2 = dt 6c 1 1
v2 c2 3
2 q 2v 2 v2 1 2 3 3 40 c c
(6.124)
If we know v(t ), we can integrate this expression over t and obtain the total energy radiated during the acceleration or deceleration of the particle. This way we obtain a classical picture of bremsstrahlung (braking radiation, free-free radiation). Often, an atomistic treatment is required for obtaining an acceptable result.
111
6.3.4 Cyclotron and synchrotron radiation

Formula (6.93) and formula (6.94) on page 105 for the magnetic eld and the radiation part of the electric eld are general, valid for any kind of motion of the localised charge. A very important special case is circular motion, i.e., the case . vv With the charged particle orbiting in the x1 x2 plane as in gure 6.10 on page 113, an orbit radius a, and an angular frequency 0 , we obtain (t ) = 0 t x (t ) = a[ x 1 cos (t ) + x 2 sin (t )] (t ) = a0 [ x v(t ) = x 1 sin (t ) + x 2 cos (t )] v = |v| = a0 (t ) = v v = (t ) = a2 x 1 0[x 2 | = a0 |v cos (t ) + x 2 sin (t )] (6.125a) (6.125b) (6.125c) (6.125d) (6.125e) (6.125f)
Because of the rotational symmetry we can, without loss of generality, rotate our coordinate system around the x3 axis so the relative vector x x from the source point to an arbitrary eld point always lies in the x2 x3 plane, i.e., x x = x x (x 2 sin + x 3 cos ) (6.126)
where is the angle between x x and the normal to the plane of the particle orbit (see Figure 6.10). From the above expressions we obtain (x x ) v = x x v sin cos = xx v (x x ) v sin sin = x x v cos (6.127a) (6.127b)
where in the last step we simply used the denition of a scalar product and the and x x is . fact that the angle between v The power ux is given by the Poynting vector, which, with the help of formula (6.93) on page 105, can be written S= 1 1 xx (E B) = |E|2 0 c0 |x x | (6.128)
Inserting this into equation (6.118) on page 110, we obtain dU rad (, ) |x x | s 2 = |E| dt c0 (6.129)
where the retarded distance s is given by expression (6.72) on page 99. With the radiation part of the electric eld, expression (6.94) on page 105, inserted, and
112
x2 (t, x) x v q a 0 v (t ) x1 (t , x ) xx
x3
F IGURE 6.10: Coordinate system for the radiation from a charged particle at x (t ) in circular motion with velocity v(t ) along the tangent and constant accel (t ) toward the origin. The x1 x2 axes are chosen so that the relative eld eration v point vector x x makes an angle with the x3 axis which is normal to the plane of the orbital motion. The radius of the orbit is a.
using (6.127a) and (6.127b) on page 112, one nds, after some algebra, that
2 2 v v 2 1 c sin cos 1 c2 sin sin dU rad (, ) 0 q 2 v = 5 dt 162 c 1 v sin cos 2
2
(6.130)
The angles and vary in time during the rotation, so that refers to a moving coordinate system. But we can parametrise the solid angle d in the angle and the (xed) angle so that d = sin d d. Integration of equation (6.130) over this d gives, after some cumbersome algebra, the angular integrated expression rad 0 q 2 v dU 2 = dt 6c 1 1
v2 c2 2
(6.131)
In equation (6.130) above, two limits are particularly interesting: 1. v/c 2. v/c 1 which corresponds to cyclotron radiation. 1 which corresponds to synchrotron radiation.
113
Cyclotron radiation
For a non-relativistic speed v c, equation (6.130) on page 113 reduces to (6.132) 2 dU rad (, ) 0 q 2 v = (1 sin2 sin2 ) dt 162 c But, according to equation (6.127b) on page 112 sin2 sin2 = cos2
(6.133)
where is dened in gure 6.10 on page 113. This means that we can write dU rad () 0 q 2 v 2 2 0 q 2 v = (1 cos2 ) = sin2 (6.134) 2 2 dt 16 c 16 c Consequently, a xed observer near the orbit plane ( /2) will observe cyclotron radiation twice per revolution in the form of two equally broad pulses of radiation with alternating polarisation.
Synchrotron radiation
When the particle is relativistic, v c, the denominator in equation (6.130) on page 113 becomes very small if sin cos 1, which denes the forward direction of the particle motion ( /2, 0). The equation (6.130) on page 113 becomes dU rad (/2, 0) 0 q 2 v 2 1 = 2 dt 16 c 1 v c
3
(6.135)
which means that an observer near the orbit plane sees a very strong pulse followed, half an orbit period later, by a much weaker pulse. The two cases represented by equation (6.134) above and equation (6.135) are very important results since they can be used to determine the characteristics of the particle motion both in particle accelerators and in astrophysical objects where a direct measurement of particle velocities are impossible. In the orbit plane ( = /2), equation (6.130) on page 113 gives
2 v v dU rad (/2, ) 0 q 2 v 2 1 c cos 1 c2 sin = 5 v dt 162 c 1 c cos 2
2
(6.136)
which vanishes for angles 0 such that v cos 0 = c v2 sin 0 = 1 2 c
(6.137a) (6.137b)
114
(t, x) xx
x2
v q a 0 v (t ) x1 (t , x )
x3
F IGURE 6.11:
When the observation point is in the plane of the particle orbit, i.e., = /2 the lobe width is given by .
Hence, the angle 0 is a measure of the synchrotron radiation lobe width ; see gure 6.11. For ultra-relativistic particles, dened by = 1 1
v2 c2
1,
v2 c2
1,
(6.138)
one can approximate 0 sin 0 = 1 v2 1 = 2 c (6.139)
Hence, synchrotron radiation from ultra-relativistic charges is characterized by a radiation lobe width which is approximately 1 0 0 (6.140)
This angular interval is swept by the charge during the time interval t = (6.141)
during which the particle moves a length interval l = vt = v (6.142)
115
in the direction toward the observer who therefore measures a compressed pulse width of length t = t vt v v 1 v l = t = 1 t = 1 1 c c c c 0 c 0 v v 1+ c 1 c 1 v2 1 1 1 = 1 = 3 v 2 0 c 20 2 0 1+ c 1/2 2 (6.143)
Typically, the spectral width of a pulse of length t is 1/t. In the ultrarelativistic synchrotron case one can therefore expect frequency components up to 1 max = 23 0 (6.144) t A spectral analysis of the radiation pulse will therefore exhibit a (broadened) line spectrum of Fourier components n0 from n = 1 up to n 23 . When many charged particles, N say, contribute to the radiation, we can have three dierent situations depending on the relative phases of the radiation elds from the individual particles: 1. All N radiating particles are spatially much closer to each other than a typical wavelength. Then the relative phase dierences of the individual electric and magnetic elds radiated are negligible and the total radiated elds from all individual particles will add up to become N times that from one particle. This means that the power radiated from the N particles will be N 2 higher than for a single charged particle. This is called coherent radiation. 2. The charged particles are perfectly evenly distributed in the orbit. In this case the phases of the radiation elds cause a complete cancellation of the elds themselves. No radiation escapes. 3. The charged particles are somewhat unevenly distributed in the orbit. This happens for an open ring current, carried initially by evenly distributed charged particles, which is subject to thermal uctuations. From statistical mechanics we know that this happens for all open systems and that the particle densities exhibit uctuations of order N . This means that out of the N particles, N will exhibit deviation from perfect randomnessand thereby perfect radiation eld cancellationand give rise to net radiation elds which are proportional to N . As a result, the radiated power will be proportional to N , and we speak about incoherent radiation. Examples of this can be found both in earthly laboratories and under cosmic conditions.
116
vt q b 0 |x x0 | B E x 3
F IGURE 6.12:
v = vx 1
The perpendicular eld of a charge q moving with velocity v = vx is E z .
Radiation in the general case

We recall that the general expression for the radiation E eld from a moving charge concentration is given by expression (6.94) on page 105. This expression in equation (6.129) on page 112 yields the general formula dU rad (, ) 0 q 2 |x x | = dt 162 cs5 (x x ) (x x ) |x x | v c
2
v (6.145)
Integration over the solid angle gives the totally radiated power as
2 v rad 0 q 2 v 2 1 c dU 2 sin = 3 dt 6c v2 1 c 2
2
(6.146)
. where is the angle between v and v , then sin = 0, we get bremsstrahlung. For v v , If v is collinear with v sin = 1, which corresponds to cyclotron radiation or synchrotron radiation.
Virtual photons
Let us consider a charge q moving with constant, high velocity v(t ) along the x1 axis. According to formula (6.194) on page 129 and gure 6.12, the perpendicular component along the x3 axis of the electric eld from this moving charge is E = E3 = q 40 s3 1 v2 c2 (x x0 ) x 3 (6.147)
117
Utilising expression (6.103) on page 107 and simple geometrical relations, we can rewrite this as b q (6.148) E = 40 2 (vt)2 + b2 /2 3/2 This represents a contracted Coulomb eld, approaching the eld of a plane wave. The passage of this eld pulse corresponds to a frequency distribution of the eld energy. Fourier transforming, we obtain E, = 1 2

dt E (t) eit =
q 42
0 bv
b v
K1
b v
(6.149)
Here, K1 is the Kelvin function (Bessel function of the second kind with imaginary argument) which behaves in such a way for small and large arguments that E, q , 42 0 bv b b v v b v b v 1 1 (6.150a) (6.150b)
E, 0,
showing that the pulse length is of the order b/(v). Due to the equipartitioning of the eld energy into the electric and magnetic elds, the total eld energy can be written = 0 U
2 d3x E = 0 bmax bmin
db 2b
2 dt vE
(6.151)
where the volume integration is over the plane perpendicular to v. With the use of Parsevals identity for Fourier transforms, formula (5.34) on page 79, we can rewrite this as = U
0
= 40 v d U

bmax
db 2b
0
d E, (6.152)
q2 2 2 0 v
bmin v/ db
bmin
from which we conclude that U q2 ln 22 0 v v bmin (6.153)
where an explicit value of bmin can be calculated in quantum theory only. As in the case of bremsstrahlung, it is intriguing to quantise the energy into photons [cf. equation (6.224) on page 133]. Then we nd that N d 2 ln c bmin d (6.154)
118
p2
p1
F IGURE 6.13:
Diagrammatic representation of the semi-classical electronelectron interaction (Mller scattering).
where = e2 /(40 c) 1/137 is the ne structure constant. Let us consider the interaction of two (classical) electrons, 1 and 2. The result of this interaction is that they change their linear momenta from p1 to p1 and p2 to p2 , respectively. Heisenbergs uncertainty principle gives bmin / p1 p1 so that the number of photons exchanged in the process is of the order N d 2 ln c p1 p1 d (6.155)
p2
p1
Since this change in momentum corresponds to a change in energy = E1 E1 and E1 = m0 c2 , we see that N d 2 ln E1 cp1 cp1 m0 c 2 E 1 E 1 (6.156)
a formula which gives a reasonable semi-classical account of a photon-induced electron-electron interaction process. In quantum theory, including only the lowest order contributions, this process is known as Mller scattering. A diagrammatic representation of (a semi-classical approximation of) this process is given in gure 6.13.
6.3.5 Radiation from charges moving in matter

When electromagnetic radiation is propagating through matter, new phenomena may appear which are (at least classically) not present in vacuum. As mentioned earlier, one can under certain simplifying assumptions include, to some extent, the inuence from matter on the electromagnetic elds by introducing new, derived
119
eld quantities D and H according to D = (t, x)E = e 0 E B = (t, x)H = m 0 H (6.157) (6.158)
Expressed in terms of these derived eld quantities, the Maxwell equations, often called macroscopic Maxwell equations, take the form D = (t, x) B E= t B=0 D H= + j(t, x) t (6.159a) (6.159b) (6.159c) (6.159d)
Assuming for simplicity that the electric permittivity and the magnetic permeability , and hence the relative permittivity e and the relative permeability m all have xed values, independent on time and space, for each type of material we consider, we can derive the general telegraphers equation [cf. equation (2.34) on page 33] 2 E E 2 E =0 2 t t2 (6.160)
describing (1D) wave propagation in a material medium. In chapter 2 we concluded that the existence of a nite conductivity, manifesting itself in a collisional interaction between the charge carriers, causes the waves to decay exponentially with time and space. Let us therefore assume that in our medium = 0 so that the wave equation simplies to 2 E 2 E =0 2 t2 If we introduce the phase velocity in the medium as 1 1 c v = = = e 0 m 0 e m (6.162) (6.161)
where, according to equation (1.11) on page 6, c = 1/ 0 0 is the speed of light, i.e., the phase speed of electromagnetic waves in vacuum, then the general solution to each component of equation (6.161) above Ei = f ( v t) + g( + v t), i = 1, 2, 3 (6.163)
120
The ratio of the phase speed in vacuum and in the medium c def = e m = c n v (6.164)
is called the refractive index of the medium. In general n is a function of both time and space as are the quantities , , e , and m themselves. If, in addition, the medium is anisotropic or birefringent, all these quantities are rank-two tensor elds. Under our simplifying assumptions, in each medium we consider n = Const for each frequency component of the elds. Associated with the phase speed of a medium for a wave of a given frequency we have a wave vector, dened as
def v = kv k kk = v v
(6.165)
As in the vacuum case discussed in chapter 2, assuming that E is time-harmonic, i.e., can be represented by a Fourier component proportional to exp{it}, the solution of equation (6.161) can be written E = E0 ei(kxt) (6.166)
where now k is the wave vector in the medium given by equation (6.165). With these denitions, the vacuum formula for the associated magnetic eld, equation (2.41) on page 33, B= E= k 1 1 kE= kE v (6.167)
is valid also in a material medium (assuming, as mentioned, that n has a xed constant scalar value). A consequence of a e 1 is that the electric eld will, in general, have a longitudinal component. It is important to notice that depending on the electric and magnetic properties of a medium, and, hence, on the value of the refractive index n, the phase speed in the medium can be smaller or larger than the speed of light: v = c = n k (6.168)
where, in the last step, we used equation (6.165). If the medium has a refractive index which, as is usually the case, dependent on frequency , we say that the medium is dispersive. Because in this case also k() and (k), so that the group velocity vg = k (6.169)
121
has a unique value for each frequency component, and is dierent from v . Except in regions of anomalous dispersion, vg is always smaller than c. In a gas of free charges, such as a plasma, the refractive index is given by the expression n2 () = 1 where 2 p =
2 p 2
(6.170)
N q2 0 m
(6.171)
is the square of the plasma frequency p . Here m and N denote the mass and number density, respectively, of charged particle species . In an inhomogeneous plasma, N = N (x) so that the refractive index and also the phase and group velocities are space dependent. As can be easily seen, for each given frequency, the phase and group velocities in a plasma are dierent from each other. If the frequency is such that it coincides with p at some point in the medium, then at that point v while vg 0 and the wave Fourier component at is reected there.
Vavilov-Cerenkov radiation
As we saw in subsection 6.1, a charge in uniform, rectilinear motion in vacuum does not give rise to any radiation; see in particular equation (6.192a) on page 128. Let us now consider a charge in uniform, rectilinear motion in a medium with electric properties which are dierent from those of a (classical) vacuum. Specically, consider a medium where = Const > 0 = 0 This implies that in this medium the phase speed is v = c 1 = <c n 0 (6.173) (6.172a) (6.172b)
Hence, in this particular medium, the speed of propagation of (the phase planes of) electromagnetic waves is less than the speed of light in vacuum, which we know is an absolute limit for the motion of anything, including particles. A medium of this kind has the interesting property that particles, entering into the medium at high speeds |v|, which, of course, are below the phase speed in vacuum, can experience that the particle speeds are higher than the phase speed in the medium. This is the basis for the Vavilov-Cerenkov radiation, more commonly known as Cerenkov radiation, that we shall now study.
122
If we recall the general derivation, in the vacuum case, of the retarded (and advanced) potentials in chapter 3 and the Linard-Wiechert potentials, equations (6.71) on page 99, we realise that we obtain the latter in the medium by a simple formal replacement c c/n in the expression (6.72) on page 99 for s. Hence, the Linard-Wiechert potentials in a medium characterized by a refractive index n, are 1 q q 1 (t, x) = = (6.174a) x )v 40 |x x | n (xc 40 s 1 qv 1 qv A(t, x) = = (6.174b) ( x x ) v 2 2 40 c |x x | n c 40 c s where now s= xx n (x x ) v c (6.175)
The need for the absolute value of the expression for s is obvious in the case when v/c 1/n because then the second term can be larger than the rst term; if v/c 1/n we recover the well-known vacuum case but with modied phase speed. We also note that the retarded and advanced times in the medium are [cf. equation (3.32) on page 50] k |x x | |x x | n =t (6.176a) c k |x x | |x x | n =t+ (6.176b) tadv = tadv (t, x x ) = t + c so that the usual time interval t t between the time measured at the point of observation and the retarded time in a medium becomes |x x | n tt = (6.177) c For v/c 1/n, the retarded distance s, and therefore the denominators in equations (6.174) above, vanish when nv v n(x x ) = x x cos c = x x (6.178) c c or, equivalently, when c cos c = (6.179) nv In the direction dened by this angle c , the potentials become singular. During the time interval t t given by expression (6.177), the eld exists within a sphere of radius |x x | around the particle while the particle moves a distance tret = tret (t, x x ) = t l = (t t )v (6.180)
123
x(t)
c x (t )
F IGURE 6.14: Instantaneous picture of the expanding eld spheres from a point charge moving with constant speed v/c > 1/n in a medium where n > 1. This generates a Vavilov-Cerenkov shock wave in the form of a cone.
along the direction of v. In the direction c where the potentials are singular, all eld spheres are tangent to a straight cone with its apex at the instantaneous position of the particle and with the apex half angle c dened according to sin c = cos c = c nv (6.181)
This cone of potential singularities and eld sphere circumferences propagates with speed c/n in the form of a shock front, called Vavilov-Cerenkov radiation.1 The Vavilov-Cerenkov cone is similar in nature to the Mach cone in acoustics.
1 The rst systematic exploration of this radiation was made by P. A. Cerenkov in 1934, who was then a post-graduate student in S. I. Vavilovs research group at the Lebedev Institute in Moscow. Vavilov wrote a manuscript with the experimental ndings, put Cerenkov as the author, and submitted it to Nature. In the manuscript, Vavilov explained the results in terms of radioactive particles creating Compton electrons which gave rise to the radiation (which was the correct interpretation), but the paper was rejected. The paper was then sent to Physical Review and was, after some controversy with the American editors who claimed the results to be wrong, eventually published in 1937. In the same year, I. E. Tamm and I. M. Frank published the theory for the eect (the singing electron). In fact, predictions of a similar eect had been made as early as 1888 by Heaviside, and by Sommerfeld in his 1904 paper Radiating body moving with velocity of light. On May 8, 1937, Sommerfeld sent a letter to Tamm via Austria, saying that he was surprised that his old 1904 ideas were now becoming interesting. Tamm, Frank and Cerenkov received the Nobel Prize in 1958 for the discovery and the interpretation of the Cerenkov eect [V. L. Ginzburg, private communication]. The rst observation of this type of radiation was reported by Marie Curie in 1910, but she never pursued the exploration of it [36].
124
In order to make some quantitative estimates of this radiation, we note that we can describe the motion of each charged particle q as a current density: j = q v (x vt ) = q v ( x vt )(y )(z ) x 1 (6.182)
which has the trivial Fourier transform q i x /v e (y )(z ) x 1 (6.183) j = 2 This Fourier component can be used in the formulae derived for a linear current in subsection 6.1.1 if only we make the replacements 0 = n2 0 (6.184a) n k (6.184b) c In this manner, using j from equation (6.183) above, the resulting Fourier trans forms of the Vavilov-Cerenkov magnetic and electric radiation elds can be calculated from the expressions (5.10) on page 72) and (5.21) on page 74, respectively. The total energy content is then obtained from equation (5.34) on page 79 (integrated over a closed sphere at large distances). For a Fourier component one obtains [cf. equation (5.37) on page 80]
rad U d
1 40 nc
d3x (j k)eikx
V
d
2
q 2 n2 = 163 0 c3
exp i x
k cos v
(6.185) sin d
2
dx
where is the angle between the direction of motion, x 1 , and the direction to the observer, k. The integral in (6.185) is singular of a Dirac delta type. If we limit the spatial extent of the motion of the particle to the closed interval [X, X ] on the x axis we can evaluate the integral to obtain
rad U d =
q 2 n2 sin2 sin2 1 ncv cos 43 0 c3 1 ncv cos v
X v 2
(6.186)
which has a maximum in the direction c as expected. The magnitude of this maximum grows and its width narrows as X . The integration of (6.186) over therefore picks up the main contributions from c . Consequently, we can set sin2 sin2 c and the result of the integration is
rad U = 2 0 rad U () sin d = cos = = 2 1 1 1 1 rad U () d
q 2 n2 sin2 c 22 0 c3
sin2
1+ 1+
nv X c v nv 2 c v
(6.187)
125
The integrand in (6.187) is strongly peaked near = c/(nv), or, equivalently, near cos c = c/(nv). This means that the integrand function is practically zero outside the integration interval [1, 1]. Consequently, one may extend the integration interval to (, ) without introducing too much an error. Via yet another variable substitution we can therefore approximate sin2 c
1 1
sin2
1+ 1+
nv X c v nv 2 c v
c2 n2 v2
cX n
sin2 x dx x2
cX = n
c2 1 2 2 nv
(6.188)
leading to the nal approximate result for the total energy loss in the frequency interval (, + d) q 2X rad U d = 20 c2 1 c2 n2 v2 d (6.189)
As mentioned earlier, the refractive index is usually frequency dependent. Realising this, we nd that the radiation energy per frequency unit and per unit length is
rad U q 2 d = 2X 40 c2
c2 n2 ()v2
(6.190)
This result was derived under the assumption that v/c > 1/n(), i.e., under the condition that the expression inside the parentheses in the right hand side is positive. For all media it is true that n() 1 when , so there exist always a highest frequency for which we can obtain Vavilov-Cerenkov radiation from a fast charge in a medium. Our derivation above for a xed value of n is valid for each individual Fourier component.
6.4 Bibliography
[1] [2] [3]
H. A LFVN
AND
(1950), p. 616.
R. B ECKER, Electromagnetic Fields and Interactions, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1982, ISBN 0-486-64290-9. M. B ORN AND E. W OLF, Principles of Optics. Electromagnetic Theory of Propagation, Interference and Diraction of Light, sixth ed., Pergamon Press, Oxford,. . . , 1980, ISBN 0-08-026481-6.
126
Bibliography
[4]
V. L. G INZBURG, Applications of Electrodynamics in Theoretical Physics and Astrophysics, Revised third ed., Gordon and Breach Science Publishers, New York, London, Paris, Montreux, Tokyo and Melbourne, 1989, ISBN 2-88124-719-9. J. D. JACKSON, Classical Electrodynamics, third ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1999, ISBN 0-471-30932-X. J. B. M ARION AND M. A. H EALD, Classical Electromagnetic Radiation, second ed., Academic Press, Inc. (London) Ltd., Orlando, . . . , 1980, ISBN 0-12-472257-1. W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026. J. S CHWINGER , L. L. D E R AAD , J R ., K. A. M ILTON , AND W. T SAI, Classical Electrodynamics, Perseus Books, Reading, MA, 1998, ISBN 0-7382-0056-5. J. A. S TRATTON, Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY and London, 1953, ISBN 07-062150-0.
[5] [6] [7]
[8] [9]
[10] J. VANDERLINDE, Classical Electromagnetic Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, Chichester, Brisbane, Toronto, and Singapore, 1993, ISBN 0-471-57269-1.
127
6.5 Examples
E XAMPLE 6.1
T HE FIELDS FROM
A UNIFORMLY MOVING CHARGE
In the special case of uniform motion, the localised charge moves in a eld-free, isolated space and we know that it will not be aected by any external forces. It will therefore move uniformly in a straight line with the constant velocity v. This gives us the possibility to extrapolate its position at the observation time, x (t), from its position at the retarded time, x (t ). Since 0, the virtual simultaneous coordinate x0 will be identical to the particle is not accelerated, v the actual simultaneous coordinate of the particle at time t, i.e., x0 (t) = x (t). As depicted in gure 6.7 on page 100, the angle between x x0 and v is 0 while then angle between x x and v is . We note that in the case of uniform velocity v, time and space derivatives are closely related in the following way when they operate on functions of x(t) [cf. equation (1.33) on page 13]: v t (6.191)
Hence, the E and B elds can be obtained from formulae (6.73) on page 100, with the potentials given by equations (6.71) on page 99 as follows: E = A 1 v v = 2 = 2 t c t c t v v vv = + = 1 2 c c c vv = 1 c2 v v v B = A = 2 = 2 = 2 c c c v v v v vv = 2 = 2 2 1 c c c c c v = 2 E c
(6.192a)
(6.192b)
Here 1 = x i x i is the unit dyad and we used the fact that v v 0. What remains is just to express in quantities evaluated at t and x. From equation (6.71a) on page 99 and equation (6.104) on page 107 we nd that = 1 q q = s2 40 s 80 s3 q v v = (x x0 ) + (x x0 ) 3 40 s c c
(6.193)
When this expression for is inserted into equation (6.192a), the following result
128
Examples
E(t, x) =
vv q vv 1 = 1 s2 c2 80 s3 c2 q v v = (x x0 ) + (x x0 ) 40 s3 c c v c v vv v v (x x0 ) 2 (x x0 ) c c c c v v2 (x x0 ) (x x0 ) 2 c c
v q (x x0 ) + 40 s3 c v c v (x x0 ) c
(6.194)
q v2 (x x0 ) 1 2 3 40 s c
0 follows. Of course, the same result also follows from equation (6.90) on page 104 with v inserted. From equation (6.194) we conclude that E is directed along the vector from the simultaneous coordinate x0 (t) to the eld (observation) coordinate x(t). In a similar way, the magnetic eld can be calculated and one nds that B(t, x) = 0 q 4 s3 1 v2 c2 v (x x0 ) = 1 vE c2 (6.195)
From these explicit formulae for the E and B elds and formula (6.103b) on page 107 for s, we can discern the following cases: 1. v 0 E goes over into the Coulomb eld ECoulomb 2. v 0 B goes over into the Biot-Savart eld 3. v c E becomes dependent on 0 4. v c, sin 0 0 E (1 v2 /c2 )ECoulomb 5. v c, sin 0 1 E (1 v2 /c2 )1/2 ECoulomb
E ND OF EXAMPLE 6.1
T HE CONVECTION POTENTIAL AND THE CONVECTION FORCE
E XAMPLE 6.2
Let us consider in more detail the treatment of the radiation from a uniformly moving rigid charge distribution. If we return to the original denition of the potentials and the inhomogeneous wave equation, formula (3.17) on page 47, for a generic potential component (t, x) and a generic source component f (t, x),
2
(t, x) =
1 2 2 (t, x) = f (t, x) c2 t2
(6.196)
129
we nd that under the assumption that v = v x 1 , this equation can be written 1 v2 c2 2 2 2 2 + 2 + 2 = f (x) x1 x2 x3 (6.197)
i.e., in a time-independent form. Transforming x1 1 = 1 v2 /c2 2 = x2 3 = x3 (6.198a) (6.198b) (6.198c)
and introducing the vectorial nabla operator in space, def (/1 , /2 , /3 ), the timeindependent equation (6.197) reduces to an ordinary Poisson equation 2 () = f ( 1 v2 /c2 1 , 2 , 3 ) f () (6.199)
in this space. This equation has the well-known Coulomb potential solution () = 1 4 f ( ) 3 d | | (6.200)
After inverse transformation back to the original coordinates, this becomes (x) = 1 4 f (x ) 3 dx s
1 2
(6.201)
where, in the denominator, s = ( x1 x1 )2 + 1 v2 c2 [( x2 x2 )2 + ( x3 x3 )2 ] (6.202)
Applying this to the explicit scalar and vector potential components, realising that for a rigid charge distribution moving with velocity v the current is given by j = v, we obtain 1 (x ) 3 dx 40 V s 1 v(x ) 3 v A(t, x) = d x = 2 (t, x) 40 c2 V s c (t, x) = For a localised charge where d3x = q , these expressions reduce to q 40 s qv A(t, x) = 40 c2 s (t, x) = (6.204a) (6.204b) (6.203a) (6.203b)
which we recognise as the Linard-Wiechert potentials; cf. equations (6.71) on page 99. We notice, however, that the derivation here, based on a mathematical technique which in fact is a Lorentz transformation, is of more general validity than the one leading to equations (6.71) on page 99. Let us now consider the action of the elds produced from a moving, rigid charge distribution represented by q moving with velocity v, on a charged particle q, also moving with velocity v. This force is given by the Lorentz force
130
Examples
F = q(E + v B)
(6.205)
With the help of equation (6.195) on page 129 and equations (6.203) on page 130, and the fact that t = v [cf. formula (6.191) on page 128], we can rewrite expression (6.205) as F=q E+v v E c2 =q v v v v c c c c (6.206)
Applying the bac-cab rule, formula (F.51) on page 180, on the last term yields v v = c c v v v2 c c c2 (6.207)
which means that we can write F = q where = 1 v2 c2 (6.209) (6.208)
The scalar function is called the convection potential or the Heaviside potential. When the rigid charge distribution is well localised so that we can use the potentials (6.204) the convection potential becomes = 1 v2 c2 q 40 s (6.210)
The convection potential from a point charge is constant on attened ellipsoids of revolution, dened through equation (6.202) on page 130 as x1 x1 + ( x2 x2 )2 + ( x3 x3 )2 1 v2 / c 2 = 2 ( x1 x1 )2 + ( x2 x2 )2 + ( x3 x3 )2 = Const
2
(6.211)
These Heaviside ellipsoids are equipotential surfaces, and since the force is proportional to the gradient of , which means that it is perpendicular to the ellipsoid surface, the force between two charges is in general not directed along the line which connects the charges. A consequence of this is that a system consisting of two co-moving charges connected with a rigid bar, will experience a torque. This is the idea behind the Trouton-Noble experiment, aimed at measuring the absolute speed of the earth or the galaxy. The negative outcome of this experiment is explained by the special theory of relativity which postulates that mechanical laws follow the same rules as electromagnetic laws, so that a compensating torque appears due to mechanical stresses within the charge-bar system.
E ND OF EXAMPLE 6.2
131
E XAMPLE 6.3
B REMSSTRAHLUNG FOR LOW
SPEEDS AND SHORT ACCELERATION TIMES
Calculate the bremsstrahlung when a charged particle, moving at a non-relativistic speed, is accelerated or decelerated during an innitely short time interval. We approximate the velocity change at time t = t0 by a delta function: (t ) = v (t t0 ) v which means that v(t0 ) =
(6.212)
dt v
(6.213)
Also, we assume v/c s |x x |
1 so that, according to formula (6.72) on page 99, (6.214)
and, according to formula (6.89) on page 104, x x0 x x (6.215)
From the general expression (6.93) on page 105 we conclude that E B and that it suces to consider E Erad . According to the bremsstrahlung expression for Erad , equation (6.113) on page 108, E= q sin v (t t0 ) 40 c2 |x x | (6.216)
In this simple case B Brad is given by B= E c (6.217)
Fourier transforming expression (6.216) above for E is trivial, yielding E = q sin v eit0 82 0 c2 |x x | (6.218)
We note that the magnitude of this Fourier component is independent of . This is a consequence of the innitely short impulsive step (t t0 ) in the time domain which produces an innite spectrum in the frequency domain. The total radiation energy is given by the expression rad = U
dt
rad dU = dt
dt
S
d2x n E 1 0 c
B 0 (6.219)
1 = 0 = 0 c
dx
S
dt EB = dt E 2
d2x
S
dt E 2
d2x
S
According to Parsevals identity [cf. equation (5.34) on page 79] the following equality holds:
132
Examples
dt E 2 = 4
d |E |2
(6.220)
which means that the radiated energy in the frequency interval (, + d) is

rad U d = 40 c
d2x |E |2 d
S
(6.221)
For our innite spectrum, equation (6.218) on page 132, we obtain q 2 (v)2 rad U d = 163 0 c3 q 2 (v)2 = 163 0 c3 = q2 30 c d2x
S 2 0 2
sin2 d |x x |2
0
d d 2
d sin sin2 d
(6.222)
v c
rad We see that the energy spectrum U is independent of frequency . This means that if we would integrate it over all frequencies [0, ), a divergent integral would result.
In reality, all spectra have nite widths, with an upper cuto limit set by the quantum condition max = 1 1 m(v + v)2 mv2 2 2 (6.223)
which expresses that the highest possible frequency max in the spectrum is that for which all kinetic energy dierence has gone into one single eld quantum (photon) with energy max . If we adopt the picture that the total energy is quantised in terms of N photons radiated during the process, we nd that
rad U d = d N
(6.224)
or, for an electron where q = |e|, where e is the elementary charge, d N = 2 e2 40 c 3 v c

2
d 1 2 137 3
v c
(6.225)
where we used the value of the ne structure constant = e2 /(40 c) 1/137. Even if the number of photons becomes innite when 0, these photons have negligible energies so that the total radiated energy is still nite.
E ND OF EXAMPLE 6.3
133
7
Relativistic Electrodynamics
We saw in chapter 3 how the derivation of the electrodynamic potentials led, in a most natural way, to the introduction of a characteristic, nite speed of propa gation in vacuum that equals the speed of light c = 1/ 0 0 and which can be considered as a constant of nature. To take this nite speed of propagation of information into account, and to ensure that our laws of physics be independent of any specic coordinate frame, requires a treatment of electrodynamics in a relativistically covariant (coordinate independent) form. This is the object of this chapter.
7.1 The special theory of relativity

An inertial system, or inertial reference frame, is a system of reference, or rigid coordinate system, in which the law of inertia (Galileos law, Newtons rst law) holds. In other words, an inertial system is a system in which free bodies move uniformly and do not experience any acceleration. The special theory of relativity1 describes how physical processes are interrelated when observed in dierent
Special Theory of Relativity, by the American physicist and philosopher David Bohm, opens with the following paragraph [7]: The theory of relativity is not merely a scientic development of great importance in its own right. It is even more signicant as the rst stage of a radical change in our basic concepts, which began in physics, and which is spreading into other elds of science, and indeed, even into a great deal of thinking outside of science. For as is well known, the modern trend is away from the notion of sure absolute truth, (i.e., one which holds independently of all conditions, contexts, degrees, and types of approximation etc..) and toward the idea that a given concept has signicance only in relation to suitable broader
1 The
135
7. Relativistic Electrodynamics
inertial systems in uniform, rectilinear motion relative to each other and is based on two postulates: Postulate 7.1 (Relativity principle; Poincar, 1905). All laws of physics (except the laws of gravitation) are independent of the uniform translational motion of the system on which they operate. Postulate 7.2 (Einstein, 1905). The velocity of light in empty space is independent of the motion of the source that emits the light. A consequence of the rst postulate is that all geometrical objects (vectors, tensors) in an equation describing a physical process must transform in a covariant manner, i.e., in the same way.
7.1.1 The Lorentz transformation

Let us consider two three-dimensional inertial systems and in vacuum which are in rectilinear motion relative to each other in such a way that moves with constant velocity v along the x axis of the system. The times and the spatial coordinates as measured in the two systems are t and ( x, y, z), and t and ( x , y , z ), respectively. At time t = t = 0 the origins O and O and the x and x axes of the two inertial systems coincide and at a later time t they have the relative location as depicted in gure 7.1 on page 137, referred to as the standard conguration. For convenience, let us introduce the two quantities = = v c 1 1 2 (7.1) (7.2)
where v = |v|. In the following, we shall make frequent use of these shorthand notations. As shown by Einstein, the two postulates of special relativity require that the spatial coordinates and times as measured by an observer in and , respectively, are connected by the following transformation: ct = (ct x) x = ( x vt ) y =y z =z
forms of reference, within which that concept can be given its full meaning.
(7.3a) (7.3b) (7.3c) (7.3d)
136
The special theory of relativity
vt y y v P(t, x, y, z) P(t , x , y , z ) O z x z O x
F IGURE 7.1: Two inertial systems and in relative motion with velocity v along the x = x axis. At time t = t = 0 the origin O of coincided with the origin O of . At time t, the inertial system has been translated a distance vt along the x axis in . An event represented by P(t, x, y, z) in is represented by P(t , x , y , z ) in .
Taking the dierence between the square of (7.3a) and the square of (7.3b) we nd that c2 t 2 x 2 = 2 c2 t2 2 xct + x2 2 x2 + 2 xvt v2 t2 v c2 2 2 = c t x2
2
1 1
c2 t 2 1
v2 c2
x2 1
v2 c2
(7.4)
From equations (7.3) on page 136 we see that the y and z coordinates are unaffected by the translational motion of the inertial system along the x axis of system . Using this fact, we nd that we can generalise the result in equation (7.4) to c2 t2 x2 y2 z2 = c2 t 2 x 2 y 2 z 2 (7.5)
which means that if a light wave is transmitted from the coinciding origins O and O at time t = t = 0 it will arrive at an observer at ( x, y, z) at time t in and an observer at ( x , y , z ) at time t in in such a way that both observers conclude that the speed (spatial distance divided by time) of light in vacuum is c. Hence, the speed of light in and is the same. A linear coordinate transformation which has this property is called a (homogeneous) Lorentz transformation.
137
7.1.2 Lorentz space

Let us introduce an ordered quadruple of real numbers, enumerated with the help of upper indices = 0, 1, 2, 3, where the zeroth component is ct (c is the speed of light and t is time), and the remaining components are the components of the ordinary R3 radius vector x dened in equation (M.1) on page 184: x = ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ) = (ct, x, y, z) (ct, x) (7.6)
We want to interpret this quadruple x as (the component form of) a radius fourvector in a real, linear, four-dimensional vector space.2 We require that this fourdimensional space be a Riemannian space, i.e., a metric space where a distance and a scalar product are dened. In this space we therefore dene a metric tensor, also known as the fundamental tensor, which we denote by g .
Radius four-vector in contravariant and covariant form

The radius four-vector x = ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ) = (ct, x), as dened in equation (7.6), is, by denition, the prototype of a contravariant vector (or, more accurately, a vector in contravariant component form). To every such vector there exists a dual vector. The vector dual to x is the covariant vector x , obtained as x = g x (7.7)
where the upper index in x is summed over and is therefore a dummy index and may be replaced by another dummy index This summation process is an example of index contraction and is often referred to as index lowering.
Scalar product and norm

The scalar product of x with itself in a Riemannian space is dened as g x x = x x (7.8)
This scalar product acts as an invariant distance, or norm, in this space. To describe the physical property of Lorentz transformation invariance, described by equation (7.5) on page 137, in mathematical language it is convenient
2 The British mathematician and philosopher Alfred North Whitehead writes in his book The Concept of Nature [43]:
I regret that it has been necessary for me in this lecture to administer a large dose of four-dimensional geometry. I do not apologise, because I am really not responsible for the fact that nature in its most fundamental aspect is four-dimensional. Things are what they are. . . .
138
to perceive it as the manifestation of the conservation of the norm in a 4D Riemannian space. Then the explicit expression for the scalar product of x with itself in this space must be x x = c2 t2 x2 y2 z2 (7.9)
We notice that our space will have an indenite norm which means that we deal with a non-Euclidean space. We call the four-dimensional space (or space-time) with this property Lorentz space and denote it L4 . A corresponding real, linear 4D space with a positive denite norm which is conserved during ordinary rotations is a Euclidean vector space. We denote such a space R4 .
Metric tensor
By choosing the metric tensor in L4 as if = = 0 1 g = 1 if = = i = j = 1, 2, 3 0 if or, in matrix notation, 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (g ) = 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
(7.10)
(7.11)
i.e., a matrix with a main diagonal that has the sign sequence, or signature, {+, , , }, the index lowering operation in our chosen at 4D space becomes nearly trivial: x = g x = (ct, x) Using matrix algebra, this can be written 0 0 x0 1 0 0 0 x x x1 x1 x1 0 1 0 0 = x2 0 0 1 0 x2 = x2 x3 x3 0 0 0 1 x3 (7.12)
(7.13)
Hence, if the metric tensor is dened according to expression (7.10) the covariant radius four-vector x is obtained from the contravariant radius four-vector x simply by changing the sign of the last three components. These components are
139
referred to as the space components; the zeroth component is referred to as the time component. As we see, for this particular choice of metric, the scalar product of x with itself becomes x x = (ct, x) (ct, x) = c2 t2 x2 y2 z2 (7.14)
which indeed is the desired Lorentz transformation invariance as required by equation (7.9) on page 139. Without changing the physics, one can alternatively choose a signature {, +, +, +}. The latter has the advantage that the transition from 3D to 4D becomes smooth, while it will introduce some annoying minus signs in the theory. In current physics literature, the signature {+, , , } seems to be the most commonly used one. The L4 metric tensor equation (7.10) on page 139 has a number of interesting properties: rstly, we see that this tensor has a trace Tr g = 2 whereas in R4 , as in any vector space with denite norm, the trace equals the space dimensionality. Secondly, we nd, after trivial algebra, that the following relations between the contravariant, covariant and mixed forms of the metric tensor hold: g = g g

(7.15a) (7.15b) = = (7.15c) (7.15d)
= g = g g
g g
g g =
Here we have introduced the 4D version of the Kronecker delta , a mixed fourtensor of rank 2 which fulls
= =
1 if = 0 if
(7.16)
Invariant line element and proper time

The dierential distance d s between the two points x and x + d x in L4 can be calculated from the Riemannian metric, given by the quadratic dierential form d s2 = g d x d x = d x d x = (d x0 )2 (d x1 )2 (d x2 )2 (d x3 )2 (7.17)
where the metric tensor is as in equation (7.10) on page 139. As we see, this form is indenite as expected for a non-Euclidean space. The square root of this
140
expression is the invariant line element d s = c dt = c dt = c dt 1 c2 dx 1 dt

2
dx 2 dt
dx 3 dt
1 (v x )2 + (vy )2 + (vz )2 = c dt c2 dt 1 2 = c = c d 1
v2 c2
(7.18)
where we introduced d = dt/ (7.19)
Since d measures the time when no spatial changes are present, it is called the proper time. Expressing the property of the Lorentz transformation described by equations (7.5) on page 137 in terms of the dierential interval d s and comparing with equation (7.17) on page 140, we nd that d s2 = c2 dt2 d x2 dy2 dz2 (7.20)
is invariant, i.e., remains unchanged, during a Lorentz transformation. Conversely, we may say that every coordinate transformation which preserves this dierential interval is a Lorentz transformation. If in some inertial system d x2 + dy2 + dz2 < c2 dt2 d s is a time-like interval, but if d x2 + dy2 + dz2 > c2 dt2 d s is a space-like interval, whereas d x2 + dy2 + dz2 = c2 dt2 (7.23) (7.22) (7.21)
is a light-like interval; we may also say that in this case we are on the light cone. A vector which has a light-like interval is called a null vector. The time-like, space-like or light-like aspects of an interval d s are invariant under a Lorentz transformation. I.e., it is not possible to change a time-like interval into a spacelike one or vice versa via a Lorentz transformation.
141
Four-vector elds
Any quantity which relative to any coordinate system has a quadruple of real numbers and transforms in the same way as the radius four-vector x does, is called a four-vector. In analogy with the notation for the radius four-vector we introduce the notation a = (a0 , a) for a general contravariant four-vector eld in L4 and nd that the lowering of index rule, formula (7.7) on page 138, for such an arbitrary four-vector yields the dual covariant four-vector eld a ( x ) = g a ( x ) = (a0 ( x ), a( x )) The scalar product between this four-vector eld and another one b ( x ) is g a ( x )b ( x ) = (a0 , a) (b0 , b) = a0 b0 a b
(7.24) (7.25)
which is a scalar eld, i.e., an invariant scalar quantity ( x ) which depends on time and space, as described by x = (ct, x, y, z).
The Lorentz transformation matrix

Introducing the transformation matrix 0 0 0 0 = 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
(7.26)
the linear Lorentz transformation (7.3) on page 136, i.e., the coordinate transformation x x = x ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ), from one inertial system to another inertial system in the standard conguration, can be written x = x (7.27)
The Lorentz group

It is easy to show, by means of direct algebra, that two successive Lorentz transformations of the type in equation (7.27), and dened by the speed parameters 1 and 2 , respectively, correspond to a single transformation with speed parameter = 1 + 2 1 + 1 2 (7.28)
This means that the nonempty set of Lorentz transformations constitutes a closed algebraic structure with a binary operation which is associative. Furthermore, one can show that this set possesses at least one identity element and at least one inverse element. In other words, this set of Lorentz transformations constitutes a mathematical group. However tempting, we shall not make any further use of group theory.
142
X0 X
0
x1 x1
F IGURE 7.2: Minkowski space can be considered an ordinary Euclidean space where a Lorentz transformation from ( x1 , X 0 = ict) to ( x 1 , X 0 = ict ) corresponds to an ordinary rotation through an angle . This rotation leaves the Euclidean 2 2 distance x1 + X 0 = x2 c2 t2 invariant.
7.1.3 Minkowski space

Specifying a point x = ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ) in 4D space-time is a way of saying that something takes place at a certain time t = x0 /c and at a certain place ( x, y, z) = ( x1 , x2 , x3 ). Such a point is therefore called an event. The trajectory for an event as a function of time and space is called a world line. For instance, the world line for a light ray which propagates in vacuum is the trajectory x0 = x1 . Introducing X 0 = i x0 = ict X =x
1 1 2 3
(7.29a) (7.29b) (7.29c) (7.29d)
X =x
2
X =x
3
dS = id s (7.29e) where i = 1, we see that equation (7.17) on page 140 transforms into dS 2 = (dX 0 )2 + (dX 1 )2 + (dX 2 )2 + (dX 3 )2 (7.30)
i.e., into a 4D dierential form which is positive denite just as is ordinary 3D Euclidean space R3 . We shall call the 4D Euclidean space constructed in this way the Minkowski space M4 .3
fact that our Riemannian space can be transformed in this way into a Euclidean one means that it is, strictly speaking, a pseudo-Riemannian space.
3 The
143
x = ct
0
w x0 x0 = x1
P O=O P ct
x1
x1 = x
F IGURE 7.3: Minkowski diagram depicting geometrically the transformation (7.33) from the unprimed system to the primed system. Here w denotes the world line for an event and the line x0 = x1 x = ct the world line for a light ray in vacuum. Note that the event P is simultaneous with all points on the x1 axis (t = 0), including the origin O. The event P , which is simultaneous with all points on the x axis, including O = O, to an observer at rest in the primed system, is not simultaneous with O in the unprimed system but occurs there at time | P P | /c.
144
As before, it suces to consider the simplied case where the relative motion between and is along the x axes. Then dS 2 = (dX 0 )2 + (dX 1 )2 = (dX 0 )2 + (d x1 )2 (7.31)
and we consider the X 0 and X 1 = x1 axes as orthogonal axes in a Euclidean space. As in all Euclidean spaces, every interval is invariant under a rotation of the X 0 x1 plane through an angle into X 0 x 1 : X 0 = x1 sin + X 0 cos x 1 = x1 cos + X 0 sin (7.32a) (7.32b)
See gure 7.2 on page 143. If we introduce the angle = i, often called the rapidity or the Lorentz boost parameter, and transform back to the original space and time variables by using equation (7.29) on page 143 backwards, we obtain ct = x sinh + ct cosh x = x cosh ct sinh (7.33a) (7.33b)
which are identical to the transformation equations (7.3) on page 136 if we let sinh = cosh = tanh = (7.34a) (7.34b) (7.34c)
It is therefore possible to envisage the Lorentz transformation as an ordinary rotation in the 4D Euclidean space M4 . Such a rotation in M4 corresponds to a coordinate change in L4 as depicted in gure 7.3 on page 144. equation (7.28) on page 142 for successive Lorentz transformation then corresponds to the tanh addition formula tanh(1 + 2 ) = tanh 1 + tanh 2 1 + tanh 1 tanh 2 (7.35)
The use of ict and M4 , which leads to the interpretation of the Lorentz transformation as an ordinary rotation, may, at best, be illustrative, but is not very physical. Besides, if we leave the at L4 space and enter the curved space of general relativity, the ict trick will turn out to be an impasse. Let us therefore immediately return to L4 where all components are real valued.
145
7.2 Covariant classical mechanics

The invariance of the dierential distance d s in L4 , and the associated dierential proper time d [see equation (7.18) on page 141] allows us to dene the four-velocity d x v c = (u0 , u) u = = (c, v) = , (7.36) d v2 v2 1 1
c2 c2
which, when multiplied with the scalar invariant m0 yields the four-momentum dx m0 c m0 v p = m0 = m0 (c, v) = , = ( p0 , p) (7.37) 2 d v v2 1 1
c2 c2
From this we see that we can write p = mv where m = m0 = m0 1

v2 c2
(7.38)
(7.39)
We can interpret this such that the Lorentz covariance implies that the mass-like term in the ordinary 3D linear momentum is not invariant. A better way to look at this is that p = mv = m0 v is the covariantly correct expression for the kinetic three-momentum. Multiplying the zeroth (time) component of the four-momentum p with the scalar invariant c, we obtain cp0 = m0 c2 = m0 c 2 1
v2 c2
= mc2
(7.40)
Since this component has the dimension of energy and is the result of a covariant description of the motion of a particle with its kinetic momentum described by the spatial components of the four-momentum, equation (7.37), we interpret cp0 as the total energy E . Hence, cp = (cp0 , cp) = (E , cp) (7.41)
146
Covariant classical electrodynamics
Scalar multiplying this four-vector with itself, we obtain cp cp = c2 g p p = c2 [( p0 )2 ( p1 )2 ( p2 )2 ( p3 )2 ] = (E , cp) (E , cp) = E 2 c2 p2 (m0 c2 )2 = v2 1 c 2 v2 1 2 c = (m0 c )
2 2
(7.42)
Since this is an invariant, this equation holds in any inertial frame, particularly in the frame where p = 0 and there we have E = m0 c 2 This is probably the most famous formula in physics history. (7.43)
7.3 Covariant classical electrodynamics

Let us consider a charge density which in its rest inertial system is denoted by 0 . The four-vector (in contravariant component form) d x = 0 u = 0 (c, v) = (c, v) d where we introduced j = 0 = 0 (7.44)
(7.45)
is called the four-current. The contravariant form of the four-del operator = / x is dened in equation (M.37) on page 190 and its covariant counterpart = / x in equation (M.38) on page 190, respectively. As is shown in example M.5 on page 199, the dAlembert operator is the scalar product of the four-del with itself: 1 2 2 (7.46) c2 t2 Since it has the characteristics of a four-scalar, the dAlembert operator is invariant and, hence, the homogeneous wave equation 2 f (t, x) = 0 is Lorentz covariant.
2
= = =
7.3.1 The four-potential

If we introduce the four-potential A = ,A c (7.47)
147
where is the scalar potential and A the vector potential, dened in section 3.3 on page 44, we can write the uncoupled inhomogeneous wave equations, equations (3.16) on page 47, in the following compact (and covariant) way:
2
A = 0 j
(7.48)
With the help of the above, we can formulate our electrodynamic equations covariantly. For instance, the covariant form of the equation of continuity, equation (1.23) on page 10 is j = 0 (7.49)
and the Lorenz-Lorentz gauge condition, equation (3.15) on page 47, can be written A = 0 The gauge transformations (3.11) on page 46 in covariant form are A A = A + ( x ) (7.51) (7.50)
If only one dimension Lorentz contracts (for instance, due to relative motion along the x direction), a 3D spatial volume element transforms according to dV = d3x = 1 dV0 = dV0 1 2 = dV0 1 v2 c2 (7.52)
where dV0 denotes the volume element as measured in the rest system, then from equation (7.45) on page 147 we see that dV = 0 dV0 (7.53)
i.e., the charge in a given volume is conserved. We can therefore conclude that the elementary charge is a universal constant.
7.3.2 The Linard-Wiechert potentials

Let us now solve the the inhomogeneous wave equations (3.16) on page 47 in vacuum for the case of a well-localised charge q at a source point dened by the radius four-vector x ( x 0 = ct , x 1 , x 2 , x 3 ). The eld point (observation point) is denoted by the radius four-vector x = ( x0 = ct, x1 , x2 , x3 ). In the rest system we know that the solution is simply ( A )0 = ,A c = 1 q ,0 40 c |x x |0 (7.54)
v=0
148
where |x x |0 is the usual distance from the source point to the eld point, evaluated in the rest system (signied by the index 0). Let us introduce the relative radius four-vector between the source point and the eld point: R = x x = (c(t t ), x x ) Scalar multiplying this relative four-vector with itself, we obtain R R = (c(t t ), x x ) (c(t t ), (x x )) = c2 (t t )2 x x
2
(7.55)
(7.56)
We know that in vacuum the signal (eld) from the charge q at x propagates to x with the speed of light c so that x x = c(t t ) Inserting this into equation (7.56) above, we see that R R = 0 or that equation (7.55) can be written R = ( x x , x x ) (7.59) (7.58) (7.57)
Now we want to nd the correspondence to the rest system solution, equation (7.54) on page 148, in an arbitrary inertial system. We note from equation (7.36) on page 146 that in the rest system c v = (c, 0) (u )0 = (7.60) , v2 v2 1 c2 1 c2
v=0
and (R )0 = ( x x , x x )0 = ( x x
0
, (x x )0 )
(7.61)
As all scalar products, u R is invariant, which means that we can evaluate it in any inertial system and it will have the same value in all other inertial systems. If we evaluate it in the rest system the result is: u R = u R
0
= (u )0 (R )0 , (x x )0 ) = c x x 0
0
= (c, 0) ( x x
(7.62)
149
We therefore see that the expression A = u q 40 cu R (7.63)
subject to the condition R R = 0 has the proper transformation properties (proper tensor form) and reduces, in the rest system, to the solution equation (7.54) on page 148. It is therefore the correct solution, valid in any inertial system. According to equation (7.36) on page 146 and equation (7.59) on page 149 u R = (c, v) x x , (x x ) = c x x v (x x ) (7.64)
Generalising expression (7.1) on page 136 to vector form: = v and introducing s xx we can write u R = cs and u = cu R 1 v , cs c2 s (7.68) (7.67)
def def
v c
(7.65)
v (x x ) x x (x x ) c
(7.66)
from which we see that the solution (7.63) can be written A ( x ) = q 40 1 v , cs c2 s = ,A c (7.69)
where in the last step the denition of the four-potential, equation (7.47) on page 147, was used. Writing the solution in the ordinary 3D way, we conclude that for a very localised charge volume, moving relative an observer with a velocity v, the scalar and vector potentials are given by the expressions q 1 q 1 = 40 s 40 |x x | (x x ) q v q v A(t, x) = = 2 2 40 c s 40 c |x x | (x x ) (t, x) = (7.70a) (7.70b)
These potentials are the Linard-Wiechert potentials that we derived in a more complicated and restricted way in subsection 6.3.1 on page 98.
150
7.3.3 The electromagnetic eld tensor

Consider a vectorial (cross) product c between two ordinary vectors a and b: c=ab= k i jk ai b j x (7.71)
= (a2 b3 a3 b2 ) x 1 + (a3 b1 a1 b3 ) x 2 + (a1 b2 a2 b1 ) x 3 We notice that the kth component of the vector c can be represented as ck = ai b j a j bi = ci j = c ji , i, j k
(7.72)
In other words, the pseudovector c = a b can be considered as an antisymmetric tensor of rank two. The same is true for the curl operator operating on a polar vector. For instance, the Maxwell equation E= B t (7.73)
can in this tensor notation be written E j Ei Bi j j = i x x t (7.74)
We know from chapter 3 that the elds can be derived from the electromagnetic potentials in the following way: B=A A E = t In component form, this can be written Bi j = A j Ai = i A j j Ai xi x j Ai Ei = i = i t Ai x t (7.76a) (7.76b) (7.75a) (7.75b)
From this, we notice the clear dierence between the axial vector (pseudovector) B and the polar vector (ordinary vector) E. Our goal is to express the electric and magnetic elds in a tensor form where the components are functions of the covariant form of the four-potential, equation (7.47) on page 147: A = ,A c (7.77)
151
Inspection of (7.77) and equation (7.76) on page 151 makes it natural to dene the four-tensor F = A A = A A x x (7.78)
This anti-symmetric (skew-symmetric), four-tensor of rank 2 is called the electromagnetic eld tensor. In matrix representation, the contravariant eld tensor can be written 0 E x /c Ey /c Ez /c E x /c 0 Bz By (F ) = (7.79) Ey /c Bz 0 Bx Ez /c By Bx 0 We note that the eld tensor is a sort of four-dimensional curl of the four-potential vector A . The covariant eld tensor is obtained from the contravariant eld tensor in the usual manner by index lowering F = g g F = A A which in matrix representation becomes 0 E x /c Ey /c E x /c 0 Bz F = Ey /c Bz 0 Ez /c By Bx (7.80)
Ez /c By Bx 0
(7.81)
Comparing formula (7.81) above with formula (7.79) we see that the covariant eld tensor is obtained from the contravariant one by a transformation E E. That the two Maxwell source equations can be written F = 0 j (7.82)
is immediately observed by explicitly solving this covariant equation. Setting = 0, corresponding to the rst/leftmost column in the matrix representation of the covariant component form of the electromagnetic eld tensor, F , i.e., equation (7.79) above, we see that F 00 F 10 F 20 F 30 1 + + + =0+ 0 1 2 3 x x x x c 1 = E = 0 j0 = 0 c c E x Ey Ez + + x y z
(7.83)
152
or, equivalently (recalling that 0 0 = 1/c2 ), E= 0
(7.84)
which we recognise at the Maxwell source equation for the electric eld, equation (1.45a) on page 15. For = 1 (the second column in equation (7.79) on page 152), equation (7.82) on page 152 yields 1 E x Bz By F 01 F 11 F 21 F 31 + + + = 2 +0+ = 0 j1 = 0 v x 0 1 2 3 x x x x c t y z (7.85) This result can be rewritten as Bz By E x 0 0 = 0 j x y z t or, equivalently, as E x (7.87) t and similarly for = 2, 3. In summary, we can write the result in three-vector form as E B = 0 j(t, x) + 0 0 (7.88) t which we recognise as the Maxwell source equation for the magnetic eld, equation (1.45d) on page 15. With the help of the fully antisymmetric rank-4 pseudotensor if , , , is an even permutation of 0,1,2,3 1 = 0 (7.89) if at least two of , , , are equal 1 if , , , is an odd permutation of 0,1,2,3 ( B) x = 0 j x + 0 0 which can be viewed as a generalisation of the Levi-Civita tensor, formula (M.18) on page 187, we can introduce the dual electromagnetic tensor F =
(7.86)
F cBz Ey Ex 0
(7.90)
In matrix form the dual eld tensor is 0 cBx cBy cB 0 Ez x F = cBy Ez 0 cBz Ey E x
(7.91)
153
i.e., the dual eld tensor is obtained from the ordinary eld tensor by the duality transformation E c2 B and B E. The covariant form of the two Maxwell eld equations E= B=0 can then be written F = 0 Explicit evaluation shows that this corresponds to (no summation!) F + F + F = 0 (7.95) (7.94) B t (7.92) (7.93)
sometimes referred to as the Jacobi identity. Hence, equation (7.82) on page 152 and equation (7.95) constitute Maxwells equations in four-dimensional formalism. It is interesting to note that equation (7.82) on page 152 and F = 0 j m (7.96)
where jm is the magnetic four-current, represent the covariant form of Diracs symmetrised Maxwell equations (1.50) on page 16.
7.4 Bibliography
[1]
J. A HARONI, The Special Theory of Relativity, second, revised ed., Dover Publications, Inc., New York, 1985, ISBN 0-486-64870-2. A. O. BARUT, Electrodynamics and Classical Theory of Fields and Particles, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1980, ISBN 0-486-64038-8. R. B ECKER, Electromagnetic Fields and Interactions, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1982, ISBN 0-486-64290-9. D. B OHM, The Special Theory of Relativity, Routledge, New York, NY, 1996, ISBN 0415-14809-X. W. T. G RANDY, Introduction to Electrodynamics and Radiation, Academic Press, New York and London, 1970, ISBN 0-12-295250-2.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
154
Bibliography
[6]
L. D. L ANDAU AND E. M. L IFSHITZ, The Classical Theory of Fields, fourth revised English ed., vol. 2 of Course of Theoretical Physics, Pergamon Press, Ltd., Oxford . . . , 1975, ISBN 0-08-025072-6. F. E. L OW, Classical Field Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1997, ISBN 0-471-59551-9. H. M UIRHEAD, The Special Theory of Relativity, The Macmillan Press Ltd., London, Beccles and Colchester, 1973, ISBN 333-12845-1. C. M LLER, The Theory of Relativity, second ed., Oxford University Press, Glasgow . . . ,
[7] [8] [9]
1972. [10] W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026. [11] J. J. S AKURAI, Advanced Quantum Mechanics, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1967, ISBN 0-201-06710-2. [12] B. S PAIN, Tensor Calculus, third ed., Oliver and Boyd, Ltd., Edinburgh and London, 1965, ISBN 05-001331-9. [13] A. N. W HITEHEAD, Concept of Nature, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge . . . , 1920, ISBN 0-521-09245-0.
155
8
Electromagnetic Fields and Particles
In previous chapters, we calculated the electromagnetic elds and potentials from arbitrary, but prescribed distributions of charges and currents. In this chapter we study the general problem of interaction between electric and magnetic elds and electrically charged particles. The analysis is based on Lagrangian and Hamiltonian methods, is fully covariant, and yields results which are relativistically correct.
8.1 Charged particles in an electromagnetic eld

We rst establish a relativistically correct theory describing the motion of charged particles in prescribed electric and magnetic elds. From these equations we may then calculate the charged particle dynamics in the most general case.
8.1.1 Covariant equations of motion

We will show that for our problem we can derive the correct equations of motion by using in four-dimensional L4 a function with similar properties as a Lagrange function in 3D and then apply a variational principle. We will also show that we can nd a Hamiltonian-type function in 4D and solve the corresponding Hamilton-type equations to obtain the correct covariant formulation of classical electrodynamics.
157
8. Electromagnetic Fields and Particles
Lagrange formalism
Let us now introduce a generalised action S4 = L4 ( x , u ) d (8.1)
where d is the proper time dened via equation (7.18) on page 141, and L4 acts as a kind of generalisation to the common 3D Lagrangian so that the variational principle S 4 =
1 0
L4 ( x , u ) d = 0
(8.2)
with xed endpoints 0 , 1 is fullled. We require that L4 is a scalar invariant which does not contain higher than the second power of the four-velocity u in order that the equations of motion be linear. According to formula (M.48) on page 192 the ordinary 3D Lagrangian is the dierence between the kinetic and potential energies. A free particle has only kinetic energy. If the particle mass is m0 then in 3D the kinetic energy is m0 v2 /2. This suggests that in 4D the Lagrangian for a free particle should be
free L4 =
1 m0 u u 2
(8.3)
For an interaction with the electromagnetic eld we can introduce the interaction with the help of the four-potential given by equation (7.77) on page 151 in the following way L4 = 1 m0 u u + qu A ( x ) 2 (8.4)
We call this the four-Lagrangian and shall now show how this function, together with the variation principle, formula (8.2), yields covariant results which are physically correct. The variation principle (8.2) with the 4D Lagrangian (8.4) inserted, leads to S 4 = m0 u u + qu A d 2 0 1 m (u u ) A 0 = u + q A u + u x 2 u x 0 =
1 0 1
(8.5)
m0 u u + q A u + u A x
d = 0
According to equation (7.36) on page 146, the four-velocity is u = dx d (8.6)
158
Charged particles in an electromagnetic eld
which means that we can write the variation of u as a total derivative with respect to : u = dx d = d ( x ) d (8.7)
Inserting this into the rst two terms in the last integral in equation (8.5) on page 158, we obtain S 4 =
1 0
m0 u
d d ( x ) + qA ( x ) + qu A x d d d
(8.8)
Partial integration in the two rst terms in the right hand member of (8.8) gives S 4 =
1 0
m0
du dA x q x + qu A x d d d
(8.9)
where the integrated parts do not contribute since the variations at the endpoints vanish. A change of irrelevant summation index from to in the rst two terms of the right hand member of (8.9) yields, after moving the ensuing common factor x outside the parenthesis, the following expression: S 4 =
1 0
m0
dA du q + qu A x d d d
(8.10)
Applying well-known rules of dierentiation and the expression (7.36) for the four-velocity, we can express dA /d as follows: dA A d x = = A u d x d (8.11)
By inserting this expression (8.11) into the second term in right-hand member of equation (8.10) above, and noting the common factor qu of the resulting term and the last term, we obtain the nal variational principle expression S 4 =
1 0
m0
du + qu A A d
x d
(8.12)
Since, according to the variational principle, this expression shall vanish and x is arbitrary between the xed end points 0 and 1 , the expression inside in the integrand in the right hand member of equation (8.12) must vanish. In other words, we have found an equation of motion for a charged particle in a prescribed electromagnetic eld: m0 du = qu A A d (8.13)
159
With the help of formula (7.80) on page 152 for the covariant component form of the eld tensor, we can express this equation in terms of the electromagnetic eld tensor in the following way: m0 du = qu F d (8.14)
This is the sought-for covariant equation of motion for a particle in an electromagnetic eld. It is often referred to as the Minkowski equation. As the reader can easily verify, the spatial part of this 4-vector equation is the covariant (relativistically correct) expression for the Newton-Lorentz force equation.
Hamiltonian formalism
The usual Hamilton equations for a 3D space are given by equation (M.55) on page 193 in appendix M. These six rst-order partial dierential equations are H dqi = pi dt H d pi = qi dt (8.15a) (8.15b)
where H ( pi , qi , t) = pi q i L(qi , q i , t) is the ordinary 3D Hamiltonian, qi is a generalised coordinate and pi is its canonically conjugate momentum. We seek a similar set of equations in 4D space. To this end we introduce a canonically conjugate four-momentum p in an analogous way as the ordinary 3D conjugate momentum: p = L4 u (8.16)
and utilise the four-velocity u , as given by equation (7.36) on page 146, to dene the four-Hamiltonian H4 = p u L4 (8.17)
With the help of these, the radius four-vector x , considered as the generalised four-coordinate, and the invariant line element d s, dened in equation (7.18) on page 141, we introduce the following eight partial dierential equations: H4 d x = p d d p H4 = x d (8.18a) (8.18b)
160
Charged particles in an electromagnetic eld
which form the four-dimensional Hamilton equations. Our strategy now is to use equation (8.16) on page 160 and equations (8.18) on page 160 to derive an explicit algebraic expression for the canonically conjugate momentum four-vector. According to equation (7.41) on page 146, c times a fourmomentum has a zeroth (time) component which we can identify with the total energy. Hence we require that the component p0 of the conjugate four-momentum vector dened according to equation (8.16) on page 160 be identical to the ordinary 3D Hamiltonian H divided by c and hence that this cp0 solves the Hamilton equations, equations (8.15) on page 160. This later consistency check is left as an exercise to the reader. Using the denition of H4 , equation (8.17) on page 160, and the expression for L4 , equation (8.4) on page 158, we obtain 1 H4 = p u L4 = p u m0 u u qu A ( x ) 2 (8.19)
Furthermore, from the denition (8.16) of the canonically conjugate four-momentum p , we see that p = L4 = u u 1 m0 u u + qu A ( x ) 2 = m0 u + qA (8.20)
Inserting this into (8.19), we obtain 1 1 H4 = m0 u u + qA u m0 u u qu A ( x ) = m0 u u 2 2 (8.21)
Since the four-velocity scalar-multiplied by itself is u u = c2 , we clearly see from equation (8.21) that H4 is indeed a scalar invariant, whose value is simply H4 = m0 c 2 2 (8.22)
However, at the same time (8.20) provides the algebraic relationship u = 1 ( p qA ) m0 (8.23)
and if this is used in (8.21) to eliminate u , one gets H4 = m0 2 1 = 2m0 1 = 2m0 1 1 ( p qA ) p qA m0 m0 ( p qA ) p qA p p 2qA p + q2 A A (8.24)
161
That this four-Hamiltonian yields the correct covariant equation of motion can be seen by inserting it into the four-dimensional Hamiltons equations (8.18) and using the relation (8.23): q H4 A = ( p qA ) x m0 x q A = m0 u m0 x A = qu x du A d p = m0 q u = d d x
(8.25)
where in the last step equation (8.20) on page 161 was used. Rearranging terms, and using equation (7.80) on page 152, we obtain m0 du = qu A A = qu F d (8.26)
which is identical to the covariant equation of motion equation (8.14) on page 160. We can then safely conclude that the Hamiltonian in question is correct. Recalling expression (7.47) on page 147 and representing the canonically conjugate four-momentum as p = ( p0 , p), we obtain the following scalar products: p p = ( p0 )2 (p)2 1 A p = p0 (p A) c 1 A A = 2 2 (A)2 c (8.27a) (8.27b) (8.27c)
Inserting these explicit expressions into equation (8.24) on page 161, and using the fact that for H4 is equal to the scalar value m0 c2 /2, as derived in equation (8.22) on page 161, we obtain the equation m0 c 2 1 = 2 2m0 2 q2 ( p0 )2 (p)2 q p0 + 2q(p A) + 2 2 q2 (A)2 c c (8.28)
which is the second order algebraic equation in p0 : ( p0 )2 2q 0 q2 2 p (p)2 2qp A + q2 (A)2 + 2 2 m2 0c = 0 c c

(pqA)2
(8.29)
with two possible solutions p0 = q c

2 (p qA)2 + m2 0c
(8.30)
162
Covariant eld theory
Since the zeroth component (time component) p0 of a four-momentum vector p multiplied by c represents the energy [cf. equation (7.41) on page 146], the positive solution in equation (8.30) on page 162 must be identied with the ordinary Hamilton function H divided by c. Consequently, H cp0 = q + c
2 (p qA)2 + m2 0c
(8.31)
is the ordinary 3D Hamilton function for a charged particle moving in scalar and vector potentials associated with prescribed electric and magnetic elds. The ordinary Lagrange and Hamilton functions L and H are related to each other by the 3D transformation [cf. the 4D transformation (8.17) between L4 and H4 ] L=pvH (8.32)
Using the explicit expressions (equation (8.31) above) and (equation (8.32)), we obtain the explicit expression for the ordinary 3D Lagrange function L = p v q c
2 (p qA)2 + m2 0c
(8.33)
and if we make the identication p qA = m0 v 1

v2 c2
= mv
(8.34)
where the quantity mv is the usual kinetic momentum, we can rewrite this expression for the ordinary Lagrangian as follows: L = qA v + mv2 q c
2 m2 v2 + m2 0c
= mv2 q( A v) mc2 = q + qA v m0 c2
v2 c2
(8.35)
What we have obtained is the relativistically correct (covariant) expression for the Lagrangian describing the motion of a charged particle in scalar and vector potentials associated with prescribed electric and magnetic elds.
8.2 Covariant eld theory

So far, we have considered two classes of problems. Either we have calculated the elds from given, prescribed distributions of charges and currents, or we have
163
i1 m k a m k a m
i+1 m k a k a m x
F IGURE 8.1: A one-dimensional chain consisting of N discrete, identical mass points m, connected to their neighbours with identical, ideal springs with spring constants k. The equilibrium distance between the neighbouring mass points is a and i1 (t), i (t), i+1 (t) are the instantaneous deviations, along the x axis, of positions of the (i 1)th, ith, and (i + 1)th mass point, respectively.
derived the equations of motion for charged particles in given, prescribed elds. Let us now put the elds and the particles on an equal footing and present a theoretical description which treats the elds, the particles, and their interactions in a unied way. This involves transition to a eld picture with an innite number of degrees of freedom. We shall rst consider a simple mechanical problem whose solution is well known. Then, drawing inferences from this model problem, we apply a similar view on the electromagnetic problem.
8.2.1 Lagrange-Hamilton formalism for elds and interactions

Consider the situation, illustrated in gure 8.1, with N identical mass points, each with mass m and connected to its neighbour along a one-dimensional straight line, which we choose to be the x axis, by identical ideal springs with spring constants k (Hookes law). At equilibrium the mass points are at rest, distributed evenly with a distance a to their two nearest neighbours so that the coordinate for the ith particle is xi = ia x . After perturbation, the motion of mass point i will be a one-dimensional oscillatory motion along x . Let us denote the deviation for mass point i from its equilibrium position by i (t) x . The solution to this mechanical problem can be obtained if we can nd a Lagrangian (Lagrange function) L which satises the variational equation L(i , i , t) dt = 0 (8.36)
According to equation (M.48) on page 192, the Lagrangian is L = T V where T denotes the kinetic energy and V the potential energy of a classical mechanical
164
system with conservative forces. In our case the Lagrangian is L= 1 N 2 m 2 i k(i+1 i ) 2 i=1 (8.37)
Let us write the Lagrangian, as given by equation (8.37), in the following way: L = aLi
i=1 N
(8.38)
Here,
Li =
1 m 2 i+1 i i ka 2 a a
(8.39)
is the so called linear Lagrange density. If we now let N and, at the same time, let the springs become innitesimally short according to the following scheme: a dx m dm = a dx ka Y i+1 i a x we obtain L= where (8.40a) linear mass density Youngs modulus (8.40b) (8.40c) (8.40d)
L dx
(8.41)
, ,t t x
1 2
(8.42)
Notice how we made a transition from a discrete description, in which the mass points were identied by a discrete integer variable i = 1, 2, . . . , N , to a continuous description, where the innitesimal mass points were instead identied by a continuous real parameter x, namely their position along x . A consequence of this transition is that the number of degrees of freedom for the system went from the nite number N to innity! Another consequence is that L has now become dependent also on the partial derivative with respect to x of the eld coordinate . But, as we shall see, the transition is well worth the
165
cost because it allows us to treat all elds, be it classical scalar or vectorial elds, or wave functions, spinors and other elds that appear in quantum physics, on an equal footing. Under the assumption of time independence and xed endpoints, the variation principle (8.36) on page 164 yields: L dt = = =0 The last integral can be integrated by parts. This results in the expression L L L d x dt = 0 (8.44) t x
t x
L , , d x dt t x L + L t
t
L
x
d x dt x
(8.43)
where the variation is arbitrary (and the endpoints xed). This means that the integrand itself must vanish. If we introduce the functional derivative L L L = (8.45) x
x
we can express this as L L =0 t

t
(8.46)
which is the one-dimensional Euler-Lagrange equation. Inserting the linear mass point chain Lagrangian density, equation (8.42) on page 165, into equation (8.46) above, we obtain the equation of motion for our one-dimensional linear mechanical structure. It is: 2 2 Y 2 = 2 t x 2 2 2 2 Y t x =0 (8.47)
i.e., the one-dimensional wave equation for compression waves which propagate with phase speed v = Y/ along the linear structure.
166
A generalisation of the above 1D results to a three-dimensional continuum is straightforward. For this 3D case we get the variational principle L dt =
L d3x dt
, x d4x
= L = =0
L L d4x x x
(8.48)
where the variation is arbitrary and the endpoints are xed. This means that the integrand itself must vanish: L L =0 (8.49) x
x
This constitutes the four-dimensional Euler-Lagrange equations. Introducing the three-dimensional functional derivative L L L = i x i
x
(8.50)
we can express this as L L =0 t

t
(8.51)
In analogy with particle mechanics (nite number of degrees of freedom), we may introduce the canonically conjugate momentum density ( x ) = (t, x) = L
t
(8.52)
and dene the Hamilton density
, ,
;t xi
L t
, t xi
(8.53)
167
If, as usual, we dierentiate this expression and identify terms, we obtain the following Hamilton density equations H = t H = t (8.54a) (8.54b)
The Hamilton density functions are in many ways similar to the ordinary Hamilton functions and lead to similar results.
The electromagnetic eld

Above, when we described the mechanical eld, we used a scalar eld (t, x). If we want to describe the electromagnetic eld in terms of a Lagrange density L and Euler-Lagrange equations, it comes natural to express L in terms of the four-potential A ( x ). The entire system of particles and elds consists of a mechanical part, a eld part and an interaction part. We therefore assume that the total Lagrange density L tot for this system can be expressed as
L tot = L mech + L inter + L eld
(8.55)
where the mechanical part has to do with the particle motion (kinetic energy). It is given by L4 /V where L4 is given by equation (8.3) on page 158 and V is the volume. Expressed in the rest mass density 0 , the mechanical Lagrange density can be written
L mech =
1 2
0u
(8.56)
The L inter part describes the interaction between the charged particles and the external electromagnetic eld. A convenient expression for this interaction Lagrange density is
L inter = j A
(8.57)
For the eld part L eld we choose the dierence between magnetic and electric energy density (in analogy with the dierence between kinetic and potential energy in a mechanical eld). Using the eld tensor, we express this eld Lagrange density as
L eld =
1 F F 40
(8.58)
168
so that the total Lagrangian density can be written 1 1 F F (8.59) L tot = 0 u u + j A + 2 40 From this we can calculate all physical quantities. Using L tot in the 3D Euler-Lagrange equations, equation (8.49) on page 167 (with replaced by A ), we can derive the dynamics for the whole system. For instance, the electromagnetic part of the Lagrangian density 1 F F (8.60) L EM = L inter + L eld = j A + 40 inserted into the Euler-Lagrange equations, expression (8.49) on page 167, yields two of Maxwells equations. To see this, we note from equation (8.60) above and the results in Example 8.1 that L EM = j A Furthermore, L EM 1 = F F ( A ) 40 ( A ) 1 ( A A )( A A ) = 40 ( A ) = 1 A A A A 40 ( A ) A A + A A = But A A = A A + A A ( A ) ( A ) ( A ) = A A + A g g A ( A ) ( A ) = A A + g g A A ( A ) ( A ) = A A + A A ( A ) ( A ) = 2 A (8.63) 1 A A A A 20 ( A ) (8.62) (8.61)
169
Similarly, A A = 2 A ( A ) so that L EM 1 1 = ( A A ) = F ( A ) 0 0 (8.65) (8.64)
This means that the Euler-Lagrange equations, expression (8.49) on page 167, for the Lagrangian density L EM and with A as the eld quantity become L EM 1 L EM = j F = 0 A ( A ) 0 or F = 0 j (8.67) (8.66)
which, according to equation (7.82) on page 152, is the covariant formulation of Maxwells source equations.
Other elds
In general, the dynamic equations for most any elds, and not only electromagnetic ones, can be derived from a Lagrangian density together with a variational principle (the Euler-Lagrange equations). Both linear and non-linear elds are studied with this technique. As a simple example, consider a real, scalar eld which has the following Lagrange density:
L =
1 m2 2 2
(8.68)
Insertion into the 1D Euler-Lagrange equation, equation (8.46) on page 166, yields the dynamic equation (
2
m2 ) = 0
(8.69)
with the solution = ei(kxt) em|x| |x| (8.70)
which describes the Yukawa meson eld for a scalar meson with mass m. With = 1 c2 t (8.71)
170
Bibliography
we obtain the Hamilton density
H =
1 2 2 c + ()2 + m2 2 2
(8.72)
which is positive denite. Another Lagrangian density which has attracted quite some interest is the Proca Lagrangian
L EM = L inter + L eld = j A +
which leads to the dynamic equation F m2 A = 0 j
1 F F + m2 A A 40
(8.73)
(8.74)
This equation describes an electromagnetic eld with a mass, or, in other words, massive photons. If massive photons would exist, large-scale magnetic elds, including those of the earth and galactic spiral arms, would be signicantly modied to yield measurable discrepancies from their usual form. Space experiments of this kind on board satellites have led to stringent upper bounds on the photon mass. If the photon really has a mass, it will have an impact on electrodynamics as well as on cosmology and astrophysics.
8.3 Bibliography
[1] A. O. BARUT, Electrodynamics and Classical Theory of Fields and Particles, Dover Publications, Inc., New York, NY, 1980, ISBN 0-486-64038-8. [2] V. L. G INZBURG, Applications of Electrodynamics in Theoretical Physics and Astrophysics, Revised third ed., Gordon and Breach Science Publishers, New York, London, Paris, Montreux, Tokyo and Melbourne, 1989, ISBN 2-88124-719-9. [3] H. G OLDSTEIN, Classical Mechanics, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1981, ISBN 0-201-02918-9. [4] W. T. G RANDY, Introduction to Electrodynamics and Radiation, Academic Press, New York and London, 1970, ISBN 0-12-295250-2. [5] L. D. L ANDAU AND E. M. L IFSHITZ, The Classical Theory of Fields, fourth revised English ed., vol. 2 of Course of Theoretical Physics, Pergamon Press, Ltd., Oxford . . . , 1975, ISBN 0-08-025072-6. [6] W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026.
171
[7] J. J. S AKURAI, Advanced Quantum Mechanics, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1967, ISBN 0-201-06710-2. [8] D. E. S OPER, Classical Field Theory, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, London, Sydney and Toronto, 1976, ISBN 0-471-81368-0.
172
Example
8.4 Example
F IELD ENERGY
DIFFERENCE EXPRESSED IN THE FIELD TENSOR
E XAMPLE 8.1
Show, by explicit calculation, that 1 1 F F = 40 2 B2 0 E 2 0 (8.75)
i.e., the dierence between the magnetic and electric eld energy densities. From formula (7.79) on page 152 we recall that 0 E x /c E y /c E z /c E x /c 0 Bz By (F ) = E y /c Bz 0 Bx E z /c By Bx 0 and from formula (7.81) on page 152 that 0 E x /c Ey /c Ez /c E x /c 0 Bz By F = E y /c Bz 0 Bx Ez /c By Bx 0
(8.76)
(8.77)
where denotes the row number and the column number. Then, Einstein summation and direct substitution yields F F = F 00 F00 + F 01 F01 + F 02 F02 + F 03 F03 + F 10 F10 + F 11 F11 + F 12 F12 + F 13 F13 + F 20 F20 + F 21 F21 + F 22 F22 + F 23 F23 + F 30 F30 + F 31 F31 + F 32 F32 + F 33 F33
2 2 2 2 2 = 0 E2 x /c E y /c E z /c 2 2 2 E2 x /c + 0 + Bz + By 2 2 2 Ey /c + B2 z + 0 + Bx 2 2 2 Ez /c + B2 y + Bx + 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 = 2E 2 x /c 2 E y /c 2 E z /c + 2 B x + 2 By + 2 Bz
(8.78)
= 2E 2 /c2 + 2 B2 = 2( B2 E 2 /c2 ) or 1 1 F F = 40 2 B2 1 2 E 0 c2 0 = 1 2 B2 0 E 2 0 (8.79) QED

E ND OF EXAMPLE 8.1
where, in the last step, the identity 0 0 = 1/c2 was used.
173
F
Formul
F.1 The electromagnetic eld
F.1.1 Maxwells equations
D= B=0 B t H=j+ D t E= (F.1) (F.2) (F.3) (F.4)
Constitutive relations
D = E B H= j = E P = 0 E (F.5) (F.6) (F.7) (F.8)
F.1.2 Fields and potentials

Vector and scalar potentials
B=A (F.9)
175
F. Formul
E =
A t
(F.10)
The Lorenz-Lorentz gauge condition in vacuum

A+ 1 =0 c2 t (F.11)
F.1.3 Force and energy

Poyntings vector
S=EH (F.12)
Maxwells stress tensor

1 T i j = Ei D j + Hi B j i j (Ek Dk + Hk Bk ) 2 (F.13)
F.2 Electromagnetic radiation

F.2.1 Relationship between the eld vectors in a plane wave
B= E k c (F.14)
F.2.2 The far elds from an extended source distribution

Brad (x) = i0 eik|x| d3 x eikx j k 4 |x| V i eik|x| Erad ( x ) = x d3 x eikx j k 40 c |x| V (F.15) (F.16)
F.2.3 The far elds from an electric dipole

Brad (x) = 0 eik|x| p k 4 |x| (F.17)
176
Electromagnetic radiation
Erad (x) =
1 eik|x| (p k) k 40 |x|
(F.18)
F.2.4 The far elds from a magnetic dipole

0 eik|x| (m k) k 4 |x| k eik|x| m k Erad ( x ) = 40 c |x| Brad (x) = (F.19) (F.20)
F.2.5 The far elds from an electric quadrupole

Brad (x) = i0 eik|x| (k Q ) k 8 |x| i eik|x| [(k Q ) k] k Erad (x) = 80 |x| (F.21) (F.22)
F.2.6 The elds from a point charge in arbitrary motion

q v2 ( x x ) 1 0 40 s3 c2 E(t, x) B(t, x) = (x x ) c|x x | E(t, x) = + (x x ) (x x0 ) v 2 c (F.23) (F.24)
s = x x (x x )
v c
(F.25) v c (F.26) (F.27)
x x0 = (x x ) |x x | t t =
x
|x x | s
177
F. Formul
F.3 Special relativity

F.3.1 Metric tensor
g 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 = 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 (F.28)
F.3.2 Covariant and contravariant four-vectors

v = g v (F.29)
F.3.3 Lorentz transformation of a four-vector

x = x = 0 0 0 0 1 = 1 2 v = c (F.30) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 (F.31)
(F.32) (F.33)
F.3.4 Invariant line element

ds = c dt = c d (F.34)
F.3.5 Four-velocity
u = dx = (c, v) d (F.35)
178
Vector relations
F.3.6 Four-momentum
p = m0 u = E ,p c (F.36)
F.3.7 Four-current density

j = 0 u (F.37)
F.3.8 Four-potential
A = ,A c (F.38)
F.3.9 Field tensor

F 0 E x /c Ey /c Ez /c E x /c 0 Bz By = A A = Ey /c Bz 0 Bx Ez /c By Bx 0 (F.39)
F.4 Vector relations

Let x be the radius vector (coordinate vector) from the origin to the point ( x1 , x2 , x3 ) ( x, y, z) and let |x| denote the magnitude (length) of x. Let further (x), (x), . . . be arbitrary scalar elds and a(x), b(x), c(x), d(x), . . . arbitrary vector elds. The dierential vector operator is in Cartesian coordinates given by
3
x i
i=1
def def x i xi xi
(F.40)
where x i , i = 1, 2, 3 is the ith unit vector and x 1 x , x 2 y , and x 3 z . In component (tensor) notation can be written i = i = , , x1 x2 x3 = , , x y z (F.41)
179
F. Formul
F.4.1 Spherical polar coordinates

Base vectors
r = sin cos x 1 + sin sin x 2 + cos x 3 = cos cos x 1 + cos sin x 2 sin x 3 = sin x 1 + cos x 2 sin x 1 = sin cos r + cos cos + cos x 2 = sin sin r + cos sin x 3 = cos r sin (F.42a) (F.42b) (F.42c) (F.43a) (F.43b) (F.43c)
Directed line element

+ r sin d dx x = dl = dr r + r d (F.44)
Solid angle element

d = sin d d (F.45)
Directed area element

d2x n = dS = dS r = r2 d r (F.46)
Volume element
d3x = dV = dr dS = r2 dr d (F.47)
F.4.2 Vector formulae

General vector algebraic identities
a b = b a = i j ai b j = ab cos a b = b a = i i jk a j bk x a (b c) = (a b) c a (b c) = b(a c) c(a b) ba c ca b a (b c) + b (c a) + c (a b) = 0 (a b) (c d) = a [b (c d)] = (a c)(b d) (a d)(b c) (a b) (c d) = (a b d)c (a b c)d (F.48) (F.49) (F.50) (F.51) (F.52) (F.53) (F.54)
180
Vector relations
General vector analytic identities

() = + (a) = a + a (a) = a a (a b) = b ( a) a ( b) (a b) = a( b) b( a) + (b )a (a )b (a b) = a ( b) + b ( a) + (b )a + (a )b =
2
(F.55) (F.56) (F.57) (F.58) (F.59) (F.60) (F.61) (F.62) (F.63)

2 2
= 0 ( a) = 0 ( a) = ( a) a a a
(F.64)
Special identities
In the following x = xi x i and x = xi x i are radius vectors, k an arbitrary constant i , and i. vector, a = a(x) an arbitrary vector eld, xi x x x
i
x=3 x=0 (k x) = k x |x| = |x| xx = |x x | |x x | x 1 = 3 |x| |x| 1 1 xx = = 3 |x x | |x x | |x x | x 1 = 2 = 4(x) |x|3 |x| xx 1 = 2 = 4(x x ) 3 |x x | |x x | 1 kx k =k = 3 |x| |x| |x| x kx k = if |x| 0 |x|3 |x|3 |x x | =
(F.65) (F.66) (F.67) (F.68) (F.69) (F.70) (F.71) (F.72) (F.73) (F.74) (F.75)
181
F. Formul
k |x|
= k2
1 |x|
= 4k(x)
(F.76) (F.77)
(k a) = k( a) + k ( a) (k a)
Integral relations
Let V (S ) be the volume bounded by the closed surface S (V ). Denote the 3dimensional volume element by d3x( dV ) and the surface element, directed along the outward pointing surface normal unit vector n , by dS( d2x n ). Then ( a) d3x = () d3x =
S
dS a
S
(F.78) (F.79) (F.80)
dS dS a
S
( a) d3x =
If S (C ) is an open surface bounded by the contour C (S ), whose line element is dl, then dl = a dl = dS
S
(F.81) (F.82)
dS ( a)
S
F.5 Bibliography
[1] G. B. A RFKEN AND H. J. W EBER, Mathematical Methods for Physicists, fourth, international ed., Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, CA . . . , 1995, ISBN 0-12-059816-7. [2] P. M. M ORSE AND H. F ESHBACH, Methods of Theoretical Physics, Part I. McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1953, ISBN 07-043316-8. [3] W. K. H. PANOFSKY AND M. P HILLIPS, Classical Electricity and Magnetism, second ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., Reading, MA . . . , 1962, ISBN 0-201-057026.
182
M
Mathematical Methods
M.1 Scalars, vectors and tensors
Every physical observable can be described by a geometric object. We will describe the observables in classical electrodynamics mathematically in terms of scalars, pseudoscalars, vectors, pseudovectors, tensors or pseudotensors and will not exploit dierential forms to any signicant degree. A scalar describes a scalar quantity which may or may not be constant in time and/or space. A vector describes some kind of physical motion due to vection and a tensor describes the motion or deformation due to some form of tension. However, generalisations to more abstract notions of these quantities are commonplace. The dierence between a scalar, vector and tensor and a pseudoscalar, pseudovector and a pseudotensor is that the latter behave dierently under such coordinate transformations which cannot be reduced to pure rotations. Throughout we adopt the convention that Latin indices i, j, k, l, . . . run over the range 1, 2, 3 to denote vector or tensor components in the real Euclidean threedimensional (3D) conguration space R3 , and Greek indices , , , , . . . , which are used in four-dimensional (4D) space, run over the range 0, 1, 2, 3.
M.1.1 Vectors
Radius vector
A vector can be represented mathematically in a number of dierent ways. One suitable representation is in terms of an ordered N -tuple, or row vector, of the coordinates xN where N is the dimensionality of the space under consideration.
183
M. Mathematical Methods
The most basic vector is the radius vector which is the vector from the origin to the point of interest. Its N -tuple representation simply enumerates the coordinates which describe this point. In this sense, the radius vector from the origin to a point is synonymous with the coordinates of the point itself. In the 3D Euclidean space R3 , we have N = 3 and the radius vector can be represented by the triplet ( x1 , x2 , x3 ) of coordinates xi , i = 1, 2, 3. The coordinates xi are scalar quantities which describe the position along the unit base vectors x i 3 3 which span R . Therefore a representation of the radius vector in R is x = xi x i xi x i
i=1 3 def
(M.1)
where we have introduced Einsteins summation convention (E) which states that a repeated index in a term implies summation over the range of the index in question. Whenever possible and convenient we shall in the following always assume E and suppress explicit summation in our formulae. Typographically, we represent a vector in 3D Euclidean space R3 by a boldface letter or symbol in a Roman font. Alternatively, we may describe the radius vector in component notation as follows: xi ( x1 , x2 , x3 ) ( x, y, z)
def
(M.2)
This component notation is particularly useful in 4D space where we can represent the radius vector either in its contravariant component form x ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ) or its covariant component form x ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 )
def def
(M.3)
(M.4)
The relation between the covariant and contravariant forms is determined by the metric tensor (also known as the fundamental tensor) whose actual form is dictated by the properties of the vector space in question. The dual representation of vectors in contravariant and covariant forms is most convenient when we work in a non-Euclidean vector space with an indenite metric. An example is Lorentz space L4 which is a 4D Riemannian space utilised to formulate the special theory of relativity. We note that for a change of coordinates x x = x ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ), due to a transformation from a system to another system , the dierential radius vector d x transforms as x dx (M.5) dx = x
184
Scalars, vectors and tensors
which follows trivially from the rules of dierentiation of x considered as functions of four variables x .
M.1.2 Fields
A eld is a physical entity which depends on one or more continuous parameters. Such a parameter can be viewed as a continuous index which enumerates the coordinates of the eld. In particular, in a eld which depends on the usual radius vector x of R3 , each point in this space can be considered as one degree of freedom so that a eld is a representation of a physical entity which has an innite number of degrees of freedom.
Scalar elds
We denote an arbitrary scalar eld in R3 by (x) = ( x1 , x2 , x3 ) ( xi )
def
(M.6)
This eld describes how the scalar quantity varies continuously in 3D R3 space. In 4D, a four-scalar eld is denoted ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ) ( x )
def
(M.7)
which indicates that the four-scalar depends on all four coordinates spanning this space. Since a four-scalar has the same value at a given point regardless of coordinate system, it is also called an invariant. Analogous to the transformation rule, equation (M.5) on page 184, for the dierential d x , the transformation rule for the dierential operator / x under a transformation x x becomes x = x x x which, again, follows trivially from the rules of dierentiation. (M.8)
Vector elds
We can represent an arbitrary vector eld a(x) in R3 as follows: a(x) = ai (x) x i In component notation this same vector can be represented as ai (x) = (a1 (x), a2 (x), a3 (x)) = ai ( x j ) (M.10) (M.9)
185
In 4D, an arbitrary four-vector eld in contravariant component form can be represented as a ( x ) = (a0 ( x ), a1 ( x ), a2 ( x ), a3 ( x )) or, in covariant component form, as a ( x ) = (a0 ( x ), a1 ( x ), a2 ( x ), a3 ( x ))

(M.11) (M.12)
where x is the radius four-vector. Again, the relation between a and a is determined by the metric of the physical 4D system under consideration. Whether an arbitrary N -tuple fulls the requirement of being an (N -dimensional) contravariant vector or not, depends on its transformation properties during a change of coordinates. For instance, in 4D an assemblage y = (y0 , y1 , y2 , y3 ) constitutes a contravariant four-vector (or the contravariant components of a fourvector) if and only if, during a transformation from a system with coordinates x to a system with coordinates x , it transforms to the new system according to the rule x y (M.13) y = x i.e., in the same way as the dierential coordinate element d x transforms according to equation (M.5) on page 184. The analogous requirement for a covariant four-vector is that it transforms, during the change from to , according to the rule x y (M.14) x i.e., in the same way as the dierential operator / x transforms according to equation (M.8) on page 185. y =
Tensor elds
We denote an arbitrary tensor eld in R3 by A(x). This tensor eld can be represented in a number of ways, for instance in the following matrix form: A11 (x) A12 (x) A13 (x) def Ai j ( xk ) A21 (x) A22 (x) A23 (x) (M.15) A31 (x) A32 (x) A33 (x) Strictly speaking, the tensor eld described here is a tensor of rank two. A particularly simple rank-two tensor in R3 is the 3D Kronecker delta symbol i j , with the following properties: i j = 0 1 if i j if i = j (M.16)
186
The 3D Kronecker delta has the following matrix representation 1 0 0 (i j ) = 0 1 0 0 0 1
(M.17)
Another common and useful tensor is the fully antisymmetric tensor of rank 3, also known as the Levi-Civita tensor if i, j, k is an even permutation of 1,2,3 1 (M.18) 0 if at least two of i, j, k are equal i jk = 1 if i, j, k is an odd permutation of 1,2,3 with the following further property
i jk ilm
= jl km jm kl
(M.19)
In fact, tensors may have any rank n. In this picture a scalar is considered to be a tensor of rank n = 0 and a vector a tensor of rank n = 1. Consequently, the notation where a vector (tensor) is represented in its component form is called the tensor notation. A tensor of rank n = 2 may be represented by a two-dimensional array or matrix whereas higher rank tensors are best represented in their component forms (tensor notation). In 4D, we have three forms of four-tensor elds of rank n. We speak of a contravariant four-tensor eld, denoted A1 2 ...n ( x ), a covariant four-tensor eld, denoted A1 2 ...n ( x ),
1 2 ...k a mixed four-tensor eld, denoted A k+1 ...n ( x ).
The 4D metric tensor (fundamental tensor) mentioned above is a particularly important four-tensor of rank 2. In covariant component form we shall denote it g . This metric tensor determines the relation between an arbitrary contravariant four-vector a and its covariant counterpart a according to the following rule: a ( x ) g a ( x )
def
(M.20)
This rule is often called lowering of index. The raising of index analogue of the index lowering rule is: a ( x ) g a ( x )
def
(M.21)
More generally, the following lowering and raising rules hold for arbitrary rank n mixed tensor elds:
1 2 ...k1 1 2 ...k1 k gk k A k+1 k+2 ...n ( x ) = Ak k+1 ...n ( x )
(M.22)
187
1 2 ...k1 k 1 2 ...k1 gk k A k k+1 ...n ( x ) = Ak+1 k+2 ...n ( x )
(M.23)
Successive lowering and raising of more than one index is achieved by a repeated application of this rule. For example, a dual application of the lowering operation on a rank 2 tensor in contravariant form yields A = g g A (M.24)
i.e., the same rank 2 tensor in covariant form. This operation is also known as a tensor contraction.
M.1.3 Vector algebra

Scalar product
The scalar product (dot product, inner product) of two arbitrary 3D vectors a and b in ordinary R3 space is the scalar number a b = ai x i b j x j = x i x j ai b j = i j ai b j = ai bi (M.25)
where we used the fact that the scalar product x i x j is a representation of the Kronecker delta i j dened in equation (M.16) on page 186. In Russian literature, the 3D scalar product is often denoted (ab). The scalar product of a in R3 with itself is a a (a)2 = |a|2 = (ai )2 = a2 and similarly for b. This allows us to write a b = ab cos (M.27)
def
(M.26)
where is the angle between a and b. In 4D space we dene the scalar product of two arbitrary four-vectors a and b in the following way a b = g a b = a b = g a b (M.28)
where we made use of the index lowering and raising rules (M.20) and (M.21). The result is a four-scalar, i.e., an invariant which is independent of in which 4D coordinate system it is measured. The quadratic dierential form d s2 = g d x d x = d x d x (M.29) i.e., the scalar product of the dierential radius four-vector with itself, is an invariant called the metric. It is also the square of the line element d s which is the distance between neighbouring points with coordinates x and x + d x .
188
Dyadic product
The dyadic product eld A(x) a(x)b(x) with two juxtaposed vector elds a(x) and b(x) is the outer product of a and b. Operating on this dyad from the right and from the left with an inner product of an vector c one obtains
A c ab c a(b c)
def def
(M.30a) (M.30b)
c A c ab (c a)b
def
def
i.e., new vectors, proportional to a and b, respectively. In mathematics, a dyadic product is often called tensor product and is frequently denoted a b. In matrix notation the outer product of a and b is written x 1 a1 b1 a1 b2 a1 b3 x 2 a2 b1 a2 b2 a2 b3 1 x 2 x 3 (M.31) ab = x x 3 a3 b1 a3 b2 a3 b3 which means that we can represent the tensor A(x) in matrix form as a1 b1 a1 b2 a1 b3 Ai j ( xk ) = a2 b1 a2 b2 a2 b3 a3 b1 a3 b2 a3 b3
(M.32)
which we identify with expression (M.15) on page 186, viz. a tensor in matrix notation.
Vector product
The vector product or cross product of two arbitrary 3D vectors a and b in ordinary R3 space is the vector c=ab= i i jk a j bk x (M.33)
Here i jk is the Levi-Civita tensor dened in equation (M.18) on page 187. Sometimes the 3D vector product of a and b is denoted a b or, particularly in the Russian literature, [ab]. Alternatively, a b = ab sin e (M.34)
where is the angle between a and b and e is a unit vector perpendicular to the plane spanned by a and b. A spatial reversal of the coordinate system ( x1 , x2 , x3 ) = ( x1 , x2 , x3 ) changes sign of the components of the vectors a and b so that in the new coordinate system a = a and b = b, which is to say that the direction of an ordinary vector is not
189
dependent on the choice of directions of the coordinate axes. On the other hand, as is seen from equation (M.33) on page 189, the cross product vector c does not change sign. Therefore a (or b) is an example of a true vector, or polar vector, whereas c is an example of an axial vector, or pseudovector. A prototype for a pseudovector is the angular momentum vector L = x p and hence the attribute axial. Pseudovectors transform as ordinary vectors under translations and proper rotations, but reverse their sign relative to ordinary vectors for any coordinate change involving reection. Tensors (of any rank) which transform analogously to pseudovectors are called pseudotensors. Scalars are tensors of rank zero, and zero-rank pseudotensors are therefore also called pseudoscalars, an example being the pseudoscalar x i (x j x k ). This triple product is a representation of the i jk component of the Levi-Civita tensor i jk which is a rank three pseudotensor.
M.1.4 Vector analysis

The del operator
In R3 the del operator is a dierential vector operator, denoted in Gibbs notation by and dened as x i
def
def xi
(M.35)
where x i is the ith unit vector in a Cartesian coordinate system. Since the operator in itself has vectorial properties, we denote it with a boldface nabla. In component notation we can write i = , , x1 x2 x3 (M.36)
In 4D, the contravariant component representation of the four-del operator is dened by = , , , x0 x1 x2 x3 , 1, 2, 3 0 x x x x (M.37)
whereas the covariant four-del operator is = (M.38)
We can use this four-del operator to express the transformation properties (M.13) and (M.14) on page 186 as y = x y (M.39)
190
and y = x y (M.40)
respectively. With the help of the del operator we can dene the gradient, divergence and curl of a tensor (in the generalised sense).
The gradient
The gradient of an R3 scalar eld (x), denoted ( x), is an R3 vector eld a(x): (x) = (x) = x i i (x) = a(x) (M.41)
From this we see that the boldface notation for the nabla and del operators is very handy as it elucidates the 3D vectorial property of the gradient. In 4D, the four-gradient is a covariant vector, formed as a derivative of a fourscalar eld ( x ), with the following component form: ( x ) = ( x ) x (M.42)
The divergence
We dene the 3D divergence of a vector eld in R3 as a(x) = x j a j (x) = i j i a j (x) = i ai (x) = ai (x) = (x) xi (M.43)
which, as indicated by the notation (x), is a scalar eld in R3 . We may think of the divergence as a scalar product between a vectorial operator and a vector. As is the case for any scalar product, the result of a divergence operation is a scalar. Again we see that the boldface notation for the 3D del operator is very convenient. The four-divergence of a four-vector a is the following four-scalar: a ( x ) = a ( x ) = a ( x ) x (M.44)
The Laplacian
The 3D Laplace operator or Laplacian can be described as the divergence of the gradient operator: 2 = = =
3 2 2 x i x j = i j i j = 2 2 i = 2 xi x j xi i=1 xi
(M.45)
The symbol 2 is sometimes read del squared. If, for a scalar eld (x), 2 < 0 at some point in 3D space, it is a sign of concentration of at that point.
191
The curl
In R3 the curl of a vector eld a(x), denoted a(x), is another R3 vector eld b(x) which can be dened in the following way: a(x) = i j ak (x) i jk x = i i jk x ak (x) = b(x) x j (M.46)
where use was made of the Levi-Civita tensor, introduced in equation (M.18) on page 187. The covariant 4D generalisation of the curl of a four-vector eld a ( x ) is the antisymmetric four-tensor eld G ( x ) = a ( x ) a ( x ) = G ( x ) (M.47)
A vector with vanishing curl is said to be irrotational. Numerous vector algebra and vector analysis formulae are given in chapter F. Those which are not found there can often be easily derived by using the component forms of the vectors and tensors, together with the Kronecker and Levi-Civita tensors and their generalisations to higher ranks. A short but very useful reference in this respect is the article by A. Evett [11].
M.2 Analytical mechanics

M.2.1 Lagranges equations
As is well known from elementary analytical mechanics, the Lagrange function or Lagrangian L is given by L(qi , q i , t) = L qi , dqi ,t dt =T V (M.48)
where qi is the generalised coordinate, T the kinetic energy and V the potential energy of a mechanical system, Using the action S =
t2 t1
dt L(qi , q i , t)
(M.49)
and the variational principle with xed endpoints t1 and t2 , S = 0 one nds that the Lagrangian satises the Euler-Lagrange equations d dt L q i L =0 qi (M.51) (M.50)
192
Analytical mechanics
To the generalised coordinate qi one denes a canonically conjugate momentum pi according to pi = L q i (M.52)
and note from equation (M.51) on page 192 that L =p i qi (M.53)
M.2.2 Hamiltons equations

From L, the Hamiltonian (Hamilton function) H can be dened via the Legendre transformation H ( pi , qi , t) = pi q i L(qi , q i , t) (M.54)
After dierentiating the left and right hand sides of this denition and setting them equal we obtain H H H L L L d pi + dqi + dt = q i d pi + pi dq i dqi dq i dt pi qi t qi q i t (M.55) According to the denition of pi , equation (M.52) above, the second and fourth terms on the right hand side cancel. Furthermore, noting that according to equation (M.53) the third term on the right hand side of equation (M.55) above is equal to p i dqi and identifying terms, we obtain the Hamilton equations: H dqi =q i = pi dt H d pi = p i = qi dt (M.56a) (M.56b)
193
M.3 Examples
E XAMPLE M.1 T ENSORS IN 3D
SPACE
x3
d2x x2 V
x1
F IGURE M.1:
Tetrahedron-like volume element V containing matter.
Consider a tetrahedron-like volume element V of a solid, uid, or gaseous body, whose atomistic structure is irrelevant for the present analysis; gure M.1 indicates how this volume may look like. Let dS = d2x n be the directed surface element of this volume element and let 2 2 the vector T n d x be the force that matter, lying on the side of d x toward which the unit normal vector n points, acts on matter which lies on the opposite side of d2x. This force concept is meaningful only if the forces are short-range enough that they can be assumed to act only in the surface proper. According to Newtons third law, this surface force fulls
T n = Tn
(M.57)
Using (M.57) and Newtons second law, we nd that the matter of mass m, which at a given instant is located in V obeys the equation of motion
194
Examples
2 2 2 2 Tn d x cos 1 T x 1 d x cos 2 T x 2 d x cos 3 T x 3 d x + Fext = ma
(M.58)
where Fext is the external force and a is the acceleration of the volume element. In other words Tn = n1 T x 1 + n2 T x 2 + n3 T x 3 + m d2x a Fext m (M.59)
Since both a and Fext /m remain nite whereas m/d2x 0 as V 0, one nds that in this limit Tn = ni T x i ni T x i
i=1 3
(M.60)
From the above derivation it is clear that equation (M.60) above is valid not only in equilibrium but also when the matter in V is in motion. Introducing the notation Ti j = Tx i
j
(M.61)
for the jth component of the vector T x i , we can write equation (M.60) in component form as follows Tn j = (T n ) j = ni T i j ni T i j
i=1 3
(M.62)
Using equation (M.62) above, we nd that the component of the vector T n in the direction of an arbitrary unit vector m is Tn m = Tn m = Tn jm j =
j=1 3 3 3
j=1
ni Ti j
i=1
m j ni T i j m j = n Tm
(M.63)
Hence, the jth component of the vector T x i , here denoted T i j , can be interpreted as the i jth component of a tensor T. Note that T n m is independent of the particular coordinate system used in the derivation. We shall now show how one can use the momentum law (force equation) to derive the equation of motion for an arbitrary element of mass in the body. To this end we consider a part V of the body. If the external force density (force per unit volume) is denoted by f and the velocity for a mass element dm is denoted by v, we obtain d dt v dm = f d3x +
2 Tn d x S
(M.64)
The jth component of this equation can be written d v j dm = dt f j d3x +

2 Tn j d x =
f j d3x +
ni T i j d2x
S
(M.65)
where, in the last step, equation (M.62) was used. Setting dm = d3x and using the divergence theorem on the last term, we can rewrite the result as
V
d v j d3x = dt
f j d3x +
T i j 3 dx xi
(M.66)
Since this formula is valid for any arbitrary volume, we must require that
195
T i j d vj fj =0 dt xi v j T i j + v v j f j =0 t xi
(M.67)
or, equivalently (M.68)
Note that v j /t is the rate of change with time of the velocity component v j at a xed point x = ( x1 , x1 , x3 ).
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.1
E XAMPLE M.2
C ONTRAVARIANT AND COVARIANT VECTORS IN

4
FLAT
L ORENTZ SPACE
The 4D Lorentz space L has a simple metric which can be described either by the metric tensor if = = 0 1 g = 1 if = = i = j = 1, 2, 3 (M.69) 0 if which, in matrix notation, is represented as 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (g ) = 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
(M.70)
i.e., a matrix with a main diagonal that has the sign sequence, or signature, {+, , , } or 1 if = = 0 g = 1 (M.71) if = = i = j = 1, 2, 3 0 if which, in matrix notation, is represented as 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (g ) = 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 i.e., a matrix with signature {, +, +, +}. Consider an arbitrary contravariant four-vector a in this space. In component form it can be written: a (a0 , a1 , a2 , a3 ) = (a0 , a)
def
(M.72)
(M.73)
According to the index lowering rule, equation (M.20) on page 187, we obtain the covariant version of this vector as
196
Examples
a (a0 , a1 , a2 , a3 ) = g a In the {+, , , } metric we obtain =0: =1: =2: =3: or a = (a0 , a1 , a2 , a3 ) = (a0 , a1 , a2 , a3 ) = (a0 , a) Radius 4-vector itself in L4 and in this metric is given by x = ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ) = ( x0 , x, y, z) = ( x0 , x) x = ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ) = ( x0 , x1 , x2 , x3 ) = ( x0 , x) where x0 = ct. Analogously, using the {, +, +, +} metric we obtain a = (a0 , a1 , a2 , a3 ) = (a0 , a1 , a2 , a3 ) = (a0 , a) a0 = 1 a0 + 0 a1 + 0 a2 + 0 a3 = a0 a1 = 0 a 1 a + 0 a + 0 a = a
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 1
def
(M.74)
(M.75) (M.76) (M.77) (M.78)
a2 = 0 a0 + 0 a1 1 a2 + 0 a3 = a2 a3 = 0 a + 0 a + 0 a + 1 a = a
3
(M.79)
(M.80)
(M.81)
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.2
I NNER PRODUCTS IN COMPLEX
VECTOR SPACE
3 6
E XAMPLE M.3
A 3D complex vector A is a vector in C (or, if we like, in R ), expressed in terms of two real vectors aR and aI in R3 in the following way
def def C3 A aR + iaI = aR a R + iaI a I AA
(M.82)
The inner product of A with itself may be dened as

2 2 A2 A A = a2 R aI + 2iaR aI A C def def
(M.83)
from which we nd that A=

2 a2 R aI + 2iaR aI C
(M.84)
Using this in equation (M.82), we see that we can interpret this so that the complex unit vector is = A = A A = aR aR
2 a2 R aI + 2iaR aI
a R + i
aI
2 a2 R aI + 2iaR aI
a I (M.85)
2 a2 aI R aI 2iaR aI a R + i 2 aR + a2 I
2 a2 R aI 2iaR aI a I C3 2 aR + a2 I
197
On the other hand, the denition of the scalar product in terms of the inner product of complex vector with its own complex conjugate yields
2 2 |A|2 A A = a2 R + aI = | A| def
(M.86)
with the help of which we can dene the unit vector as = A = A |A| = aR aR
2 a2 R + aI
a R + i
aI
2 a2 R + aI
a I (M.87)
2 2 a2 aI a2 R + aI R + aI a R + i a I C3 2 2 2 2 aR + aI aR + aI
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.3
E XAMPLE M.4
S CALAR PRODUCT,
NORM AND METRIC IN
L ORENTZ SPACE
In L4 the metric tensor attains a simple form [see example M.2 on page 196] and, hence, the scalar product in equation (M.28) on page 188 can be evaluated almost trivially. For the {+, , , } signature it becomes a b = (a0 , a) (b0 , b) = a0 b0 a b The important scalar product of the L4 radius four-vector with itself becomes x x = ( x0 , x) ( x0 , x) = (ct, x) (ct, x) = (ct)2 ( x1 )2 ( x2 )2 ( x3 )2 = s2 which is the indenite, real norm of L4 . The L4 metric is the quadratic dierential form d s2 = d x d x = c2 (dt)2 (d x1 )2 (d x2 )2 (d x3 )2 (M.90) (M.89) (M.88)
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.4
198
Examples
T HE FOUR - DEL OPERATOR IN L ORENTZ SPACE
E XAMPLE M.5
In L the contravariant form of the four-del operator can be represented as = 1 , c t = 1 , c t (M.91)
and the covariant form as = 1 , c t = 1 , c t (M.92)
Taking the scalar product of these two, one obtains = 1 2 2 = c 2 t 2

2
(M.93) , and sometimes dened with an oppoE ND OF EXAMPLE M.5
which is the dAlembert operator, sometimes denoted site sign convention.
G RADIENTS OF SCALAR FUNCTIONS OF RELATIVE DISTANCES IN 3D
E XAMPLE M.6
3
Very often electrodynamic quantities are dependent on the relative distance in R between two vectors x and x , i.e., on |x x |. In analogy with equation (M.35) on page 190, we can dene the primed del operator in the following way: =x i = xi (M.94)
Using this, the unprimed version, equation (M.35) on page 190, and elementary rules of dierentiation, we obtain the following two very useful results: (|x x |) = x i |x x | xx | x x | = = x i xi |x x | xi (M.95)
= (|x x |) and 1 |x x | = xx = |x x |3 1 |x x | (M.96)
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.6
199
E XAMPLE M.7
D IVERGENCE IN 3D
For an arbitrary R3 vector eld a(x ), the following relation holds: a(x ) |x x | = a(x ) + a(x ) |x x | 1 |x x | (M.97)
which demonstrates how the primed divergence, dened in terms of the primed del operator in equation (M.94) on page 199, works.
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.7
E XAMPLE M.8
T HE L APLACIAN AND THE D IRAC

3
DELTA
A very useful formula in 3D R is 1 |x x | = 2 1 |x x | = 4(x x ) (M.98)
where (x x ) is the 3D Dirac delta function. This formula follows directly from the fact that d3x
V
1 |x x |
d3x
V
xx |x x |3
d2x n
S
xx |x x |3
(M.99)
equals 4 if the integration volume V (S ), enclosed by the surface S (V ), includes x = x , and equals 0 otherwise.
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.8
E XAMPLE M.9
T HE CURL OF A GRADIENT
Using the denition of the R3 curl, equation (M.46) on page 192, and the gradient, equation (M.41) on page 191, we see that [(x)] = i j k (x) i jk x (x) x i x j xk (x) x 1 (x) x 2 (x) x 3 (M.101) (M.100)
which, due to the assumed well-behavedness of (x), vanishes: i j k (x) i jk x = = + + 0

i jk
2 2 x2 x3 x3 x2 2 2 x3 x1 x1 x3 2 2 x1 x2 x2 x1
200
Examples
We thus nd that [(x)] 0 for any arbitrary, well-behaved R scalar eld (x).
3
(M.102)
In 4D we note that for any well-behaved four-scalar eld ( x ) ( )( x ) 0 so that the four-curl of a four-gradient vanishes just as does a curl of a gradient in R3 . Hence, a gradient is always irrotational.
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.9
(M.103)
T HE DIVERGENCE OF A CURL
E XAMPLE M.10
With the use of the denitions of the divergence (M.43) and the curl, equation (M.46) on page 192, we nd that [ a(x)] = i [ a(x)]i =
i jk i j ak (x)
(M.104)
Using the denition for the Levi-Civita symbol, dened by equation (M.18) on page 187, we nd that, due to the assumed well-behavedness of a(x), i
i jk j ak (x)
= =
xi
i jk
ak x j a1 (x) a2 (x) a3 (x) (M.105)
2 2 x2 x3 x3 x2 + + 2 2 x3 x1 x1 x3 2 2 x1 x2 x2 x1
0 i.e., that [ a(x)] 0 for any arbitrary, well-behaved R3 vector eld a(x). In 4D, the four-divergence of the four-curl is not zero, for G = a ( x )
2
(M.106)
a ( x )
(M.107)
E ND OF EXAMPLE M.10
201
M.4 Bibliography
[1] G. B. A RFKEN AND H. J. W EBER, Mathematical Methods for Physicists, fourth, international ed., Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, CA . . . , 1995, ISBN 0-12-059816-7. [2] R. A. D EAN, Elements of Abstract Algebra, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1967, ISBN 0-471-20452-8. [3] A. A. E VETT, Permutation symbol approach to elementary vector analysis, American Journal of Physics, 34 (1965), pp. 503507. [4] P. M. M ORSE AND H. F ESHBACH, Methods of Theoretical Physics, Part I. McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, NY . . . , 1953, ISBN 07-043316-8. [5] B. S PAIN, Tensor Calculus, third ed., Oliver and Boyd, Ltd., Edinburgh and London, 1965, ISBN 05-001331-9. [6] W. E. T HIRRING, Classical Mathematical Physics, Springer-Verlag, New York, Vienna, 1997, ISBN 0-387-94843-0.
202
Index
acceleration eld, 104 advanced time, 50 Ampres law, 6 Ampre-turn density, 61 anisotropic, 120 anomalous dispersion, 121 antenna, 81 antenna current, 81 antenna feed point, 82 antisymmetric tensor, 151 associated Legendre polynomial, 91 associative, 142 axial gauge, 53 axial vector, 151, 189 Bessel functions, 88 Biot-Savarts law, 8 birefringent, 120 braking radiation, 111 bremsstrahlung, 111, 117 canonically conjugate four-momentum, 160 canonically conjugate momentum, 160, 192 canonically conjugate momentum density, 167 Cerenkov radiation, 122 characteristic impedance, 31 classical electrodynamics, 1, 9 closed algebraic structure, 142 coherent radiation, 116 collisional interaction, 120 complete -Lorenz gauge, 52 complex eld six-vector, 24 complex notation, 35 complex vector, 197 component notation, 184 concentration, 191 conservative eld, 12 conservative forces, 164 constitutive relations, 15 contravariant component form, 138, 184 contravariant eld tensor, 151 contravariant four-tensor eld, 187 contravariant four-vector, 186 contravariant four-vector eld, 141 contravariant vector, 138 convection potential, 131 convective derivative, 13 cosine integral, 85 Coulomb gauge, 51 Coulombs law, 2 covariant, 136 covariant component form, 184 covariant eld tensor, 152 covariant four-tensor eld, 187 covariant four-vector, 186 covariant four-vector eld, 141 covariant vector, 138 cross product, 189 curl, 191 cuto, 133 cyclotron radiation, 113, 117 dAlembert operator, 28, 47, 147, 198 del operator, 190 del squared, 191 dierential distance, 140 dierential vector operator, 190 dipole antennas, 81 Dirac delta, 200 Diracs symmetrised Maxwell equations, 16 dispersive, 121 displacement current, 11 divergence, 191 dot product, 188 dual electromagnetic tensor, 153 dual vector, 138 duality transformation, 17, 153
203
Index
dummy index, 138 dyadic product, 188 dyons, 17 E1 radiation, 94 E2 radiation, 97 Einsteins summation convention, 184 electric charge conservation law, 10 electric charge density, 4 electric conductivity, 11 electric current density, 8 electric dipole moment, 93 electric dipole moment vector, 58 electric dipole radiation, 94 electric displacement, 15 electric displacement current, 22 electric displacement vector, 57, 59 electric eld, 3 electric eld energy, 63 electric monopole moment, 57 electric permittivity, 120 electric polarisation, 58 electric quadrupole moment tensor, 58 electric quadrupole radiation, 97 electric quadrupole tensor, 96 electric susceptibility, 59 electric volume force, 64 electricity, 2 electrodynamic potentials, 44 electromagnetic eld tensor, 151 electromagnetic scalar potential, 45 electromagnetic vector potential, 44 electromagnetism, 1 electromagnetodynamic equations, 16 electromagnetodynamics, 17 electromotive force (EMF), 12 electrostatic scalar potential, 43 electrostatics, 2 electroweak theory, 1 energy theorem in Maxwells theory, 63 equation of continuity, 10, 148 equations of classical electrostatics, 9 equations of classical magnetostatics, 9 Euclidean space, 143 Euclidean vector space, 139 Euler-Lagrange equation, 166 Euler-Lagrange equations, 167, 192
Euler-Mascheroni constant, 85 event, 142 far eld, 72 far zone, 75 Faradays law, 12 eld, 185 eld Lagrange density, 168 eld point, 4 eld quantum, 133 ne structure constant, 118, 133 four-current, 147 four-del operator, 190 four-dimensional Hamilton equations, 160 four-dimensional vector space, 138 four-divergence, 191 four-gradient, 191 four-Hamiltonian, 160 four-Lagrangian, 158 four-momentum, 146 four-potential, 147 four-scalar, 185 four-tensor elds, 187 four-vector, 141, 185 four-velocity, 145 Fourier integral, 30 Fourier series, 29 Fourier transform, 30, 48 free-free radiation, 111 functional derivative, 166 fundamental tensor, 138, 184, 187 Galileos law, 135 gauge xing, 53 gauge function, 46 gauge invariant, 46 gauge transformation, 46 Gausss law of electrostatics, 5 general inhomogeneous wave equations, 46 generalised coordinate, 160, 192 generalised four-coordinate, 160 Gibbs notation, 190 gradient, 191 Green function, 48, 91 group theory, 142 group velocity, 121 Hamilton density, 167
204
Hamilton density equations, 167 Hamilton equations, 160, 193 Hamilton function, 193 Hamilton gauge, 53 Hamiltonian, 193 Heaviside potential, 131 Heaviside-Larmor-Rainich transformation, 17 Helmholtz theorem, 47 help vector, 90 Hertz method, 89 Hertz vector, 90 Hodge star operator, 17 homogeneous wave equation, 28 Hookes law, 164 Huygens principle, 48 identity element, 142 in a medium, 123 incoherent radiation, 116 indenite norm, 139 index contraction, 138 index lowering, 138 induction eld, 72 inertial reference frame, 135 inertial system, 135 inhomogeneous Helmholtz equation, 48 inhomogeneous time-independent wave equation, 48 inhomogeneous wave equation, 47 inner product, 188 instantaneous, 108 interaction Lagrange density, 168 intermediate eld, 75 invariant, 185 invariant line element, 140 inverse element, 142 inverse Fourier transform, 30 irrotational, 6, 192 Jacobi identity, 154 Kelvin function, 118 kinetic energy, 164, 192 kinetic momentum, 163 Kronecker delta, 186 Lagrange density, 165
Lagrange function, 164, 192 Lagrangian, 164, 192 Laplace operator, 191 Laplacian, 191 Larmor formula for radiated power, 108 law of inertia, 135 Legendre polynomial, 91 Legendre transformation, 193 Levi-Civita tensor, 187 Linard-Wiechert potentials, 99, 130, 150 light cone, 141 light-like interval, 141 line element, 188 linear mass density, 165 longitudinal component, 32 loop antenna, 85 Lorentz boost parameter, 145 Lorentz force, 14, 63, 130 Lorentz space, 139, 184 Lorentz transformation, 130, 137 Lorenz-Lorentz gauge, 51 Lorenz-Lorentz gauge condition, 47, 148 lowering of index, 187 M1 radiation, 96 Mller scattering, 119 Mach cone, 124 macroscopic Maxwell equations, 120 magnetic charge density, 16 magnetic current density, 16 magnetic dipole moment, 60, 96 magnetic dipole radiation, 96 magnetic displacement current, 22 magnetic eld, 7 magnetic eld energy, 63 magnetic eld intensity, 61 magnetic ux, 12 magnetic ux density, 8 magnetic four-current, 154 magnetic induction, 8 magnetic monopole equation of continuity, 17 magnetic monopoles, 16 magnetic permeability, 120 magnetic susceptibility, 61 magnetisation, 61 magnetisation currents, 60
205
Index
magnetising eld, 15, 57, 61 magnetostatic vector potential, 44 magnetostatics, 6 massive photons, 171 mathematical group, 142 matrix form, 186 Maxwell stress tensor, 65 Maxwells macroscopic equations, 16, 62 Maxwells microscopic equations, 15 Maxwell-Lorentz equations, 15 mechanical Lagrange density, 168 metric, 184, 188 metric tensor, 138, 184, 187 Minkowski equation, 160 Minkowski space, 143 mixed four-tensor eld, 187 mixing angle, 17 momentum theorem in Maxwells theory, 65 monochromatic, 69 multipole expansion, 89, 92 near zone, 75 Newtons rst law, 135 Newton-Lorentz force equation, 160 non-Euclidean space, 139 non-linear eects, 11 norm, 138, 198 null vector, 141 observation point, 4 Ohms law, 11 one-dimensional wave equation, 33 outer product, 188 Parsevals identity, 79, 118, 132 phase velocity, 120 photon, 133 physical measurable, 35 plane wave, 33 plasma, 121 plasma frequency, 122 Poincar gauge, 53 Poisson equation, 130 Poissons equation, 43 polar vector, 151, 189 polarisation charges, 59 polarisation currents, 60
polarisation potential, 90 polarisation vector, 89 positive denite, 143 positive denite norm, 139 potential energy, 164, 192 potential theory, 91 power ux, 63 Poynting vector, 63 Poyntings theorem, 63 Proca Lagrangian, 170 propagator, 48 proper time, 141 pseudo-Riemannian space, 143 pseudoscalar, 183 pseudoscalars, 190 pseudotensor, 183 pseudotensors, 190 pseudovector, 151, 183, 189 quadratic dierential form, 140, 188 quantum chromodynamics, 1 quantum electrodynamics, 1, 51 quantum mechanical nonlinearity, 4 radial gauge, 53 radiation eld, 72, 75, 104 radiation elds, 75 radiation resistance, 85 radius four-vector, 138 radius vector, 183 raising of index, 187 rank, 186 rapidity, 145 refractive index, 120 relative electric permittivity, 65 relative magnetic permeability, 65 relative permeability, 120 relative permittivity, 120 Relativity principle, 136 relaxation time, 30 rest mass density, 168 retarded Coulomb eld, 75 retarded potentials, 50 retarded relative distance, 99 retarded time, 50 Riemann-Silberstein vector, 24 Riemannian metric, 140
206
Riemannian space, 138, 184 row vector, 183 scalar, 183, 191 scalar eld, 142, 185 scalar product, 188 shock front, 124 signature, 139, 196 simultaneous coordinate, 128 skew-symmetric, 151 skin depth, 35 source point, 4 space components, 139 space-like interval, 141 space-time, 139 special theory of relativity, 135 spherical Bessel function of the rst kind, 91 spherical Hankel function of the rst kind, 91 spherical waves, 78 standard conguration, 136 standing wave, 82 super-potential, 90 synchrotron radiation, 113, 117 synchrotron radiation lobe width, 114 telegraphers equation, 33, 120 temporal dispersive media, 11 temporal gauge, 53 tensor, 183 tensor contraction, 188 tensor eld, 186 tensor notation, 187 tensor product, 189 three-dimensional functional derivative, 167 time component, 139 time-dependent Poissons equation, 51 time-harmonic wave, 29 time-independent diusion equation, 31 time-independent telegraphers equation, 33 time-independent wave equation, 31 time-like interval, 141 total charge, 57 transverse components, 32 transverse gauge, 52
uncoupled inhomogeneous wave equations, 47 vacuum permeability, 6 vacuum permittivity, 2 vacuum polarisation eects, 4 vacuum wave number, 31 variational principle, 192 Vavilov-Cerenkov cone, 124 Vavilov-Cerenkov radiation, 122, 124 vector, 183 vector product, 189 velocity eld, 104 velocity gauge condition, 52 virtual simultaneous coordinate, 100, 104 wave equations, 27 wave vector, 33, 121 world line, 142 Youngs modulus, 165 Yukawa meson eld, 170
207

EMFT Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EMFT Book

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EMFT Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electromagnetic Field Theory

E LECTROMAGNETIC F IELD T HEORY

Electromagnetic Field Theory

U PSILON B OOKS U PPSALA S WEDEN

To the memory of professor

dear friend, great physicist, poet and a truly remarkable man.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

M.1 Tetrahedron-like volume element of matter

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

1.1.1 Coulombs law

physicist and philosopher P IERRE D UHEM (18611916) once wrote:

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

1.1.2 The electrostatic eld

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

R3 scalar eld (x), we immediately nd that in electrostatics

1.2.1 Ampres law

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

which clearly exhibits the expected symmetry in terms of loops C and C .

1.2.2 The magnetostatic eld

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

can be dened as dBstat (x)

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

1.3.1 Equation of continuity for electric charge

1.3.2 Maxwells displacement current

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

1.3.3 Electromotive force

we will need to consider this generalisation and formal identication further.

Downloaded from http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.

where dl is a tangential line element of the closed loop C .

1.3.4 Faradays law of induction

Version released 29th September 2007 at 21:55.